Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

for+whose

  • 21 περί

    περί (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. and acc., in our lit. not w. dat. (B-D-F §203; Rob. 617; see the lit. s.v. ἀνά, beg.) lit. ‘round about’
    ① w. the gen. to denote the object or pers. to which (whom) an activity or esp. inward process refers or relates, about, concerning
    ⓐ after verbs that denote an oral or written expression or its reception, a mental action, knowing, thinking, recognizing, etc., about, concerning; s. the entries ἀκούω 1c and 3c, ἀναγγέλλω 2 end, ἀπαγγέλλω 1, ἀπολογέομαι, γνωρίζω 1, γογγύζω, γράφω 2c, δηλόω, διαβεβαιόομαι, διαλέγομαι 1, διδάσκω 2d, διηγέομαι, εἶπον 1a, ἐντέλλω, ἐπιστέλλω, κατηχέω, λαλέω 2aγ, λέγω 1bδ; λόγον αἰτεῖν, ἀποδιδόναι, διδόναι, ποιεῖσθαι (s. λόγος 2a); μαρτυρέω 1b, μνημονεύω 1c, ὁμιλέω, πυνθάνομαι, προκαταγγέλλω, προφητεύω, ὑπομιμνῄσκω, χρηματίζομαι; ἀγνοέω 1a, ἀπορέω, ἐπινοέω, ἐπίσταμαι 2, οἶδα 1h, πέπεισμαι (s. πείθω 4), πιστεύω 1aβ. Also used w. the substantives belonging to these verbs or verbs w. similar mngs.: ἀπολογία 2a, γογγυσμός; διήγησις, εὐαγγέλιον, ἦχος 2, πρόφασις, φήμη; s. these entries. γινώσκω J 7:17. συμφωνέω Mt 18:19. τί ὑμῖν δοκεῖ περὶ τοῦ Χριστοῦ; what do you think of the Christ? 22:42.
    ⓑ after verbs that express considering, asking, examining, charging, judging, censuring, punishing, praising, etc., on account of, because of, for, concerning. S. the entries ἀποστοματίζω, ἀπορέω, διαπορέω, ἐγκαλέω, εἶδον (3: deliberate concerning), ἐκζητέω 1, ἐλέγχω 2 and 3, ἐξετάζω 1 and 2b, ἐπερωτάω 1a, ἐπιζητέω 1b, ἐρωτάω 1, ζητέω 2, κατηγορέω, παραμυθέομαι.—διαλογίζομαι Lk 3:15. κρίνω J 8:26. λιθάζω 10:33. θεὸν αἰνέω Lk 19:37. περὶ οὗ … οἱ κατήγοροι οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν ἔφερον his accusers brought no charge of this kind Ac 25:18 (BWeiss, Preuschen take περὶ οὗ w. σταθέντες, which immediately follows it, and understand it to mean ‘around him’, ‘near him’ [περί τινος in this sense IG XIV, 2508, 4]).—S. also the entry ζήτημα.
    ⓒ after verbs that denote emotion. S. the entries ἀγανακτέω, θαυμάζω 1aβ, καυχάομαι, σπλαγχνίζομαι.
    ⓓ after verbs of caring (for). S. the entries μέλει 1b, μεριμνάω, προβλέπω.
    ⓔ after other verbs and expressions, mostly with regard to, with reference to, in relation to, w. respect to εὐλογεῖν Hb 11:20. ἀναβαίνειν περὶ τοῦ ζητήματος go up about the question Ac 15:2. ἐντολὰς λαμβάνειν Col 4:10. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν 1 Cor 7:37 (s. ἐξουσία 1). περὶ πάντων εὐοδοῦσθαι be well off in all respects 3J 2 (περὶ π.=‘in all resp.’: Pla., Gorg. 23, 467d.—Others take it as ‘above all’; cp. Il. 1, 287; 21, 566).
    ⓕ w. certain verbs and nouns such as ‘ask’, ‘pray’, ‘prayer’, etc., περί introduces the pers. or thing in whose interest the petition is made. Thus it takes the place of ὑπέρ (B-D-F §229, 1; Rob. 618; WSchulze, Zeitschr. für vergl. Sprachforschung 44, 1911, 359: Callim., Epigr. 55, 3.—SIG 1170, 30 περὶ τούτου παρεκάλεσα τὸν θεόν; POxy 1298, 4; 1494, 6; JosAs 28:5 ἐξιλάσομαι αὐτοὺς περὶ ὑμῶν; EpArist 273) for. S. the entries δέομαι b, δέησις, ἐρωτάω 2, παρακαλέω 3. προσεύχεσθαι (Gen 20:7; 1 Km 7:5; 2 Macc 1:6; 15:14) Lk 6:28; Col 1:3 (v.l. ὑπέρ); 4:3; 1 Th 5:25; 2 Th 1:11; 3:1; Hb 13:18. προσευχὴ γίνεται Ac 12:5. Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη περὶ ὑμῶν; 1 Cor 1:13 v.l. (for ὑπέρ). τὸ αἷμα τὸ περὶ πολλῶν ἐκχυννόμενον Mt 26:28 (cp. Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 730, 29 p. 415, 29 Jac. περὶ τῶν διαδόχων αὐτοῦ ἅπαν … παθεῖν). ἀγῶνα ἔχω περὶ ὑμῶν Col 2:1 v.l. (for ὑπέρ).
    ⓖ when used w. ἁμαρτία the word ‘for’ has the sense to take away, to atone for περὶ ἁμαρτίας (Num 8:8) Ro 8:3 (difft. TThornton, JTS 22, ’71, 515–17). Ἰ. Χρ. τοῦ δόντος ἑαυτὸν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν Gal 1:4 v.l. (for ὑπέρ; CBreytenbach, Versöhnung ’89, 197). περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν ἔπαθεν 1 Pt 3:18 (v.l. ἀπέθανεν). Cp. Hb 5:3c. προσφορὰ περὶ ἁμαρτίας 10:18. θυσία περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν vs. 26. εἰσφέρεται τὸ αἷμα περὶ ἁμαρτίας 13:11. τὸ περὶ τῆς ἁμαρτίας (i.e. προσφερόμενον) the sin-offering (Lev 6:23; 14:19) Hb 10:6, 8 (both Ps 39:7).
    ⓗ περί τινος abs. at the beginning of a sentence concerning, with reference to (GrBar 8:6; Just., A I, 15, 1 al.; SIG 736, 1; PEleph 13, 4f; BGU 246, 13; 17; 1097, 5 [c. 50 A.D.]; 1095, 9 [57 A.D.]) περὶ ὧν (=περὶ τούτων ἃ) ἐγράψατε concerning the things you wrote (to me) 1 Cor 7:1 (s. γράφω 2c). Cp. 8:1; 16:1, 12. In other, seemingly similar, places it is to be connected w. the verb that follows: Mt 22:31; 24:36; Mk 12:26; 13:32; 1 Cor 7:25; 8:4; 12:1; 2 Cor 9:1; 1 Th 4:9; 5:1. (Cp. the formulation of answers by Claudius in PLond 1912; on Paul’s rhetorical use, cp. Demosth. 7, 1; 14; 18; 30; 39; MMitchell NovT 31, ’89, 229–56.)
    ⓘ w. the art. τὰ περί τινος what concerns someone or someth., his or its circumstances, situation, condition (X., An. 2, 5, 37 ὅπως μάθοι τὰ περὶ Προξένου; Sir 19:30; TestJob 41:3; JosAs 19:2; GrBar 4:12; Just., A I, 33, 5; Tat. 36, 2) τὰ περὶ (τοῦ) Ἰησοῦ the reports about Jesus, concerning his miracles Mk 5:27; of Jesus’ passion experiences Lk 24:19; of the preaching about Jesus Ac 18:25; cp. 28:31. τὰ περὶ ἑαυτοῦ (αὐτοῦ, ἐμοῦ, ἐμαυτοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν) Lk 24:27; Ac 23:11, 15; 24:10; 28:15; Eph 6:22; Phil 1:27; 2:19f; Col 4:8.—τὰ περὶ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ θεοῦ the things concerning the Kgdm. of God Ac 1:3; 19:8 (v.l. without the art.). τὰ περὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ 24:22 (ὁδός 3c).
    ② w. the acc., gener. in ref. to position rather than mental or emotional considerations as in the use of the gen., about
    ⓐ of place around, about, near (TestJob 40:6 περί τινα φάτνην; 12 περὶ τὴν οἰκίαν; Ath. 25, 1 ἄγγελοι … περὶ τὸν ἀέρα ἔχοντες καὶ τὴν γῆν)
    α. (all) around ἕως ὅτου σκάψω περὶ αὐτήν until I dig (all) around it Lk 13:8. περιαστράψαι φῶς περὶ ἐμέ Ac 22:6b. αἱ παρθένοι ἑστηκυῖαι περὶ τὴν πύλην who stood about the door Hs 9, 3, 2.
    β. of a part of the body around which someth. goes (Heraclid. Pont. Fgm. 55 W. περὶ τὸ μέτωπον; PsSol 2:20 περὶ τὴν κεφαλήν; TestJob 46:9 περὶ τὸ στῆθος; JosAs 3:9 περὶ τὰς χεῖρας): a belt περὶ τὴν ὀσφύν around the waist Mt 3:4; Mk 1:6 (JosAs 14:16); cp. Rv 15:6. A millstone περίκειται περὶ τὸν τράχηλον Mk 9:42; Lk 17:2 (JosAs 18:5); cp. Mt 18:6.
    γ. of nearby places: αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις the towns near them (Sodom and Gomorrah) Jd 7. τὰ περὶ τὸν τόπον the region around the place Ac 28:7 (Diod S 1, 50, 6 τὰ π. τὴν Μέμφιν; Strabo 12, 7, 3). Without the art. περὶ Τύρον καὶ Σιδῶνα the neighborhood of T. and S. Mk 3:8.
    δ. of persons who are standing, sitting, working or staying close to someone ὄχλον περὶ αὐτόν Mt 8:18; cp. Mk 9:14. τοὺς περὶ αὐτὸν κύκλῳ καθημένους Mk 3:34; cp. vs. 32. οἱ περὶ αὐτόν those about him, his followers Mk 4:10; Lk 22:49. The central person in the group can be included: οἱ περὶ Παῦλον Paul and his companions Ac 13:13; 21:8 v.l. οἱ περὶ τὸν Πέτρον Peter and those with him short ending of Mark; GHb 356, 38f= ISm 3:2; cp. GHb 22, 39 (Pla., Thu., X.; Diod S 11, 40, 3; 11, 61, 3 οἱ περὶ τὸν Κίμωνα=Cimon and his men; ins, pap; 2 Macc 1:33; 8:30; 4 Macc 2:19; JosAs 26:5; Jos., Bell. 5, 10, Ant. 18, 354 al.; Tat. 36, 1 al.; B-D-F §228; Rob. 620). οἱ περὶ τὸν κεντυρίωνα the centurion and his men GPt 11:45. πρὸς τὰς περὶ Μάρθαν καὶ Μαριάμ J 11:19 v.l. prob. means only the two sisters to Martha and Mary (cp. Phalaris, Ep. 136; Polyb. 4, 36, 6; 21, 11, 2; Diod S 1, 16, 1; 1, 37, 3; 16, 85, 2 οἱ περὶ Χάρητα καὶ Λυσικλέα=Chares and Lysicles [are made generals]; Plut., Tib. Gracch. 825 [2, 3] οἱ περὶ Δροῦσον = Δροῦσος, Pyrrh. 395 [20, 1] οἱ περὶ Γάϊον Φαβρίκιον = Γάϊος Φαβρίκιος; Diog. L. 2, 43 οἱ περὶ Αἰσχύλον=Aeschylus; 2, 105; EpArist 51; Philo, Vi. Cont. 15; Jos., Ant. 13, 187; 15, 370, C. Ap. 1, 17). οἱ π. τὸν Παῦλον Ac 27:1a v.l.=Παῦλος vs. 1b.
    ⓑ of time about, near (Hdt., Thu., X. et al.; PGen 17, 10; PGiss 70, 7; Gen 15:12; Ex 11:4) περὶ τρίτην ὥραν (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 45 §182; TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 11 [Stone p. 12] and B 6 p. 109, 27 [Stone p. 66]; Jos., Vi. 239; cp. 243; PSI 184, 5 χθὲς περὶ ἕκτην ὥραν) about the third hour Mt 20:3. Likew. w. the hour given vs. 5f, 9; 27:46; Ac 10:3 (ὡσεὶ περὶ ὥραν ἐνάτην; ApcMos 17 περὶ ὥραν, ὅταν), 9; cp. Mk 6:48; Ac 22:6a.
    ⓒ of being occupied with (Just., D. 2, 5 χρόνον ἐκτρίβειν περὶ ἐκεῖνα τὰ μαθματα; 8, 3 τῆς περὶ τὸ θεῖον ὁρμῆς; Tat. 27, 3; Ath. 17, 3) περισπᾶσθαι (q.v. 2), θορυβάζεσθαι περί τι Lk 10:40f. οἱ π. τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάται the workers who were occupied with such things (s. ἐργάτης 1a) Ac 19:25.
    ⓓ with regard or respect to (Diod S 2, 18, 2 ἡ περὶ αὐτὴν ἀρετή=her valor; Lucian, Vit. Auct. 17 οἱ περὶ μοιχείαν νόμοι; ApcEsdr 1:6 δικάσασθαι … περὶ τὸ γένος τῶν χριστιανῶν; Jos., Ant. 5, 259; Mel., HE 4, 26, 13 σου τὸ σπουδαῖον περὶ τὴν πίστιν) ἀστοχεῖν 1 Ti 6:21; 2 Ti 2:18. ναυαγεῖν 1 Ti 1:19. νοσεῖν have a morbid craving for someth. (s. νοσέω) 6:4. περὶ πάντα in all respects Tit 2:7.—Pol 4:3; παράδοξον περὶ Ἰοῦστον … γέγονος a miracle that took place involving Justus Papias (2:9). On 2 Cl 17:2 s. ἀνάγω 5.—τὰ περὶ ἐμέ my situation, how I am getting along (Menand., Sam. 623 S. [Kö. 278]; UPZ 68, 6 [152 B.C.] τὰ περὶ Ἀπολλώνιον; Just., A I, 54, 2 τὰ περὶ τὸν Χριστόν; Tat. 8, 4 τὰ περὶ σέ; Jos., Ant. 2, 60) Phil 2:23. αἱ π. τὰ λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι desires for other things Mk 4:19.—DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > περί

  • 22 πρεσβύτερος

    πρεσβύτερος, α, ον (Hom.+; comp. of πρέσβυς)
    ① pert. to being relatively advanced in age, older, old
    ⓐ of an individual person older of two ὁ υἱὸς ὁ πρ. (cp. Aelian, VH 9, 42; TestJob 15:2 τῷ ἀδελφῷ τῷ πρεσβυτέρῳ; JosAs; Just., A II, 6, 1) Lk 15:25; of Manasseh (w. Ephraim) B 13:5. In contrast to the younger generation οἱ πρεσβύτεροι the older ones J 8:9. Opp. οἱ νεανίσκοι Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1). Opp. νεώτεροι (s. νεός 3aβ) 1 Ti 5:1 (similar advice, containing a contrast betw. πρ. and νεώτ., from ins and lit. in MDibelius, Hdb. ad loc.); 1 Pt 5:5 (though here the πρεσβύτεροι are not only the older people, but at the same time, the ‘elders’; s. 2bβ). The same double mng. is found for πρεσβύτεροι in 1 Cl 1:3 beside νέοι, while in 3:3; 21:6, beside the same word, the concept of being old is the dominant one (as Jos., C. Ap. 2, 206). On the disputed pass. Hv 3, 1, 8 (οἱ νεανίσκοι … οἱ πρεσβύτεροι) cp. MDibelius, Hdb. ad loc.—Fem. πρεσβυτέρα old(er) woman (opp. νεωτέρα, as Gen 19:31) 1 Ti 5:2.—With no ref. to younger persons, w. complete disappearance of the comparative aspect: πρεσβύτερος an old man (Jos., Ant. 13, 226; 292 [as a witness of events in the past, as Ps.-Pla., Virt. 3, 377b; 4, 377c]) Hv 3, 12, 2; cp. 3, 11, 3. The personified church is called λίαν πρεσβυτέρα very old 3, 10, 3; cp. 3, 11, 2. She appears as ἡ πρ. the elderly woman 2, 1, 3; 3, 1, 2; 3, 10, 6; 9 and has τὰς τρίχας πρεσβυτέρας the hair of an old woman 3, 10, 4; 5; 3, 12, 1.
    ⓑ of a period of time (Petosiris, Fgm. 3 and 4 mention οἱ πρεσβύτεροι and οἱ νεώτεροι. In both instances the context shows that the reference is to astrologers from earlier and more recent times) οἱ πρεσβύτεροι the men of old, our ancestors Hb 11:2. ἡ παράδοσις τῶν πρεσβυτέρων the tradition of the ancients (cp. Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 35, 253 τῶν π. συγγράμματα) Mt 15:2; Mk 7:3, 5 (ELohse, D. Ordination im Spätjudentum u. NT, ’51, 50–56: scholars).
    ② an official (cp. Lat. senator), elder, presbyter
    ⓐ among the Jews (the congregation of a synagogue in Jerusalem used πρεσβύτεροι to denote its officers before 70 A.D.: SEG VIII, 170, 9; cp. Dssm., LO 378–80 [LAE 439–41]).
    α. for members of local councils in individual cities (cp. Josh 20:4; Ruth 4:2; 2 Esdr 10:14; Jdth 8:10; 10:6) Lk 7:3; 1 Cl 55:4.—Schürer II, 185.
    β. for members of a group in the Sanhedrin (Schürer II, 206–8; JJeremias, Jerusalem z. Zt. Jesu II B 1: Die gesellschaftl. Oberschicht 1929, 88ff). They are mentioned together w. (the) other groups: ἀρχιερεῖς (Ac 4:5 has ἄρχοντες for this), γραμματεῖς, πρεσβύτεροι (the order is not always the same) Mt 16:21; 26:3 v.l.; 27:41; Mk 8:31; 11:27; 14:43, 53; 15:1; Lk 9:22; 20:1.—Only ἀρχιερεῖς (Ac 4:8 has for this ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ) and πρεσβύτεροι (τοῦ λαοῦ: cp. Ex 19:7; Num 11:16b, 24; 1 Macc 7:33; 12:35; Just., D. 40, 4 al.) Mt 21:23; 26:3, 47, 59 v.l.; 27:1, 3, 12, 20; 28:(11), 12; Lk 22:52 (here, as an exception, οἱ στρατηγοὶ τοῦ ἱεροῦ); Ac 4:23; 23:14; 25:15; cp. 24:1. Also οἱ πρεσβύτεροι καὶ οἱ ἱερεῖς GPt 7:25 (for this combination cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 83; 12, 406).—Only πρεσβύτεροι and γραμματεῖς Mt 26:57; Ac 6:12.—The use of πρεσβύτερος as a title among the Jews of the Diaspora appears quite late, except for the allusions in the LXX (cp. Schürer III/1, 102; MAMA III [Cilicia], 344; 448 [cp. ZNW 31, ’32, 313f]. Whether πρεσβύτερος is to be understood in the older Roman inscriptions [CIJ 378] as a title [so CIJ p. lxxxvi], remains doubtful).
    ⓑ among the Christians (for their use of the word as a title one must bear in mind not only the Jewish custom, but also its use as a t.t. among the ἔθνη, in connection w. associations of the ‘old ones’ [FPoland, Geschichte des griech. Vereinswesens 1909, 98ff] and to designate civic as well as religious officials [Dssm., B 153ff=BS 154–57, NB 60ff=BS 233–35, also LO 315, 5; HHausschildt, ZNW 4, 1903, 235ff; MStrack, ibid. 213ff; HLietzmann, ZWT 55, 1914, 116–32 [=Kl. Schr. I ’58, 156–69]; MDibelius, exc. on 1 Ti 5:17ff; RAlastair-Campbell, The Elders, Seniority within Earliest Christianity ’94.].—BGU 16, 6 [159 A.D.] πρεσβύτεροι ἱερεῖς θεοῦ Σοκνοπαίου; 347, 6; PVindBosw 1, 31 [87 A.D.].—As honorary title: Iren. 4, 26, 5 [Harv. II 238, 3]. The Engl. word ‘priest’ comes fr. πρεσβύτερος via Lat. presbyter; later Christian usage is largely, if not entirely, responsible for this development; s. OED s.v. ‘priest’ B).
    α. Ac 11:30; 14:23; 15:2, 4, 6, 22f; 16:4 (in all the places in Ac 15 and 16 mention is made of οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι in the Jerusalem church); 20:17; 21:18; 1 Ti 5:17, 19 (Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 103a Jac. νεωτέρῳ πρεσβυτέρου καταμαρτυρεῖν οὐκ ἔξεστι); Tit 1:5; Js 5:14; 1 Pt 5:1, 5 (s. 1a above); 1 Cl 44:5; 47:6; 54:2; 57:1. WWrede, Untersuchungen zum 1 Cl 1891, 8ff.—Acc. to 2 Cl 17:3, 5 exhortation and preaching in the church services were among their duties.—In Ign. the πρεσβύτεροι come after the bishop, to whom they are subordinate IMg 2; 3:1; 6:1, or betw. the bishop and the deacons IPhld inscr.; 10:2; IPol 6:1, or the higher rank of the bishop in comparison to them is made plain in some other way ITr 3:1; 12:2 (s. πρεσβυτέριον b; cp. Hippol., Ref. 9, 12, 22).—Polycarp—an ἐπίσκοπος, accord. to the title of the Ep. bearing his name—groups himself w. πρεσβύτεροι in Pol inscr., and further takes the presence of presbyters in Philippi for granted (beside deacons, though no ἐπίσκοπος is mentioned; cp. Hdb. on Pol inscr.) Pol 5:3.
    β. Just how we are to understand the words ὁ πρεσβύτερος, applied to himself by the author of the two smallest Johannine letters 2J 1; 3J 1, remains in doubt. But in any case it is meant to indicate a position of great dignity the elder.—HWindisch, exc. on 3J, end; ESchwartz, Über den Tod der Söhne Zebedaei 1904, 47; 51; HWendt, ZNW 23, 1924, 19; EKäsemann, ZTK 48, ’51, 292–311; DWatson, NTS 35, ’89, 104–30, rhetorical analysis of 2J.—ὁ πρ. and οἱ πρ. are mentioned by Papias in these much-discussed passages: 2:3, 4, 5, 7, 14, 15. For some of the lit. s. the note on JKleist’s transl. ’48, p. 207 n. 18.
    γ. In Rv there are 24 elders sitting on thrones about the throne of God; they form a heavenly council of elders (cp. Is 24:23) 4:4, 10; 5:5–14; 7:11, 13; 11:16; 14:3; 19:4. The elders have been understood as glorified human beings of some kind or astral deities (or angels) (for the var. views s. RCharles, ICC Rv I 128–33; JMichl, D. 24 Ältesten in d. Apk. d. hl. J. ’38); the number 24 has been referred to the following: the 24 priestly classes of the Jews (1 Ch 24:7–18; Jos., Ant. 7, 365–67) whose heads were called ‘elders’ (Yoma 1, 5; Tamid 1, 1; Middoth 1, 8); the 24 stars which, according to Babylonian belief, stood half on the north and half on the south of the zodiac (Diod S 2, 31, 4; POsl 4, 19: HGunkel, Z. religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 42f; Boll 35f); the 24 hours of the day, represented as old men w. shining garments and w. crowns (acc. to the Test. of Adam [ed. CBezold, TNöldeke Festschr. 1906, 893–912]: JWellhausen, Analyse der Offb. Joh. 1907, p. 9, 1; NMorosof, Offb. Joh. 1912, 32); the 24 Yazatas in the state of the gods in heaven, acc. to Persian thought (Bousset). It is certainly an open question whether, or how far, the writer of Rv had any of these things in mind.—On the presbyters, and esp. on the question how ἐπίσκοπος and πρεσβύτερος were originally related to each other (a question which is raised particularly in the pastorals; cp. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. after 1 Ti 3:7 section 2 [w. lit.] and before 5:17), s. the lit. s.v. ἐπίσκοπος.—BEaston, Pastoral Epistles ’47, 188–97; WMichaelis, Das Ältestenamt ’53; GBornkamm, πρεσβύτερος; RCampbell, The Elders ’94.—B. 1472. DELG s.v. πρέσβυς. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πρεσβύτερος

  • 23 λαμβάνω

    + V 408-428-225-72-202=1335 Gn 2,15.21.22.23; 3,6
    to take [τι] Gn 2,21; id. [τινα] Gn 2,15; to take [τινος] Gn 3,6; id. [ἀπό τινος] Ex 12,7; to take away, to remove [τι] 2 Chr 16,2; to take away [τινα] 2 Kgs 2,5
    to take by violence, to carry off as booty [τι] Jos 11,19; to take by violence, to take captive [τινα] Jgs 8,16; to capture (a city) [τι] 1 Chr 11,8; to take up, to carry away [τινα] (of storm) Is 41,16
    to take hold of, to seize [τινα] (of pains) Ex 15,14; to attack [τινα] (of sudden pain) 2 Mc 9,5; to catch, to overtake [τινα] (of sleep) DnLXX 4,33b
    to get, to receive [τι] Lv 25,36; id. [abs.] Hab 1,3; id. [τινα] Ps 48(49),16; to take from, to accept from [τι παρά τινος] Gn 23,13; to gain, to win (virtue)
    [τι] Zech 6,13; to receive (for money), to buy [τι] Dt 2,6, cpr. Ez 29,14, Jos 11,19; to take up, to pronounce [τι] Mi 2,4
    to take up, to pronounce [τι] Mi 2,4; to incur [τι] Lv 5,1; to levy, to impose [τι] 1 Mc 3,31; to choose, to select [τινα] Nm 8,6; to take, to choose 2 Mc 8,7; to fetch, to find [τινα] 2 Kgs 3,15; to take as [τινα
    +pred.] Lv 18,18; to take sb for [τινα εἴς τινα] Gn 43,18; id. [τινα εἴς τι] 1 Mc 14,5
    οὐ λήμψεται μάχαιραν he shall not draw the sword Is 2,4; ἔλαβεν Ααρων τὴν Ελισαβεθ αὐτῷ γυναῖκα Aaron took Elisabeth as his wife Ex 6,23; ἔλαβον αὐτὴν ἐμαυτῷ εἰς γυναῖκα I took her as my wife Gn 12,19; ἧς οὐχὶ πεῖραν ἔλαβεν ὁ ποὺς αὐτῆς βαίνειν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς whose foot has not yet attempted or tried to go upon the earth Dt 28,56; ἐὰν λάβῃς τὸν συλλογισμὸν τῶν υἱῶν Ισραηλ if you should take account of the children of Israel, if you should count the children of Israel Ex 30,12; πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν λαβόντας keeping or bearing in mind 2 Mc 8,17; οὐκ ἔλαβεν συντέλειαν it is not finished 1 Ezr 6,19; λημψόμεθα τὴν ἐκδίκησιν ἡμῶν ἐξ αὐτοῦ we shall take our vengeance on him, we shall avenge ourselves on him Jer 20,10; λήμψονται τὴν κόλασιν αὐτῶν περὶ πάντων, ὧν ἐποίησαν they shall receive or bear their punishment for all the things they have done, they shall be punished for all the things they have done Ez 43,11; οὐ λήμψῃ πρόσωπον πτωχοῦ you shall not take the poor into consideration, you shall not show partiality towards the poor, you shall not favour the person of the poor Lv 19,15; ὅταν λάβω καιρόν whenever I seize the opportunity, whenever I take a set time Ps 74(75),3; πᾶς, ὂς ἂν λάψῃ τῇ γλώσσῃ αὐτοῦ ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος whosoever shall lap of the water with his tongue Jgs 7,5; δεξιὰς λαβεῖν to take the right hand, to shake hands, to pledge friendship 1 Mc 13,50; ἔλαβεν ἐν γαστρὶ Ρεβεκκα Rebecca became pregnant, Rebecca conceived Gn 25,21; τὰ πρόβατα ἐ̓ν γαστρὶ λαμβάνοντα the sheep carrying their young, the sheep that had conceived in the belly, the pregnant sheep Gn 30,41; ἔλαβεν ἐπὶ ματαίῳ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ he lifted up his soul to vanity, he desired vanity Ps 23(24),4; ἑώρα ἀδύνατον εἶναι τὸν Σιμωνα παῦλαν οὐ λημψόμενον τῆς ἀνοίας he saw that it was impossible that Simon would leave or abandon his folly 2 Mc 4,6; τὸν δὲ ἀγορασμὸν τῆς σιτοδοσίας τοῦ οἴκου ὑμῶν λαβόντες ἀπέλθατε go away with the sale of your house’s grain Gn 42,33; λαβόντες χρόνον at the appointed time 1 Ezr 9,12
    *1 Chr 24,31 ἔλαβον they received corr. ἔβαλον for MT ויפילו they cast (lots), cpr. 1 Sm 14,42, Est 3,7, Neh 11,1; *Jer 23,39 ἐγὼ λαμβάνω I (will) take, seize-אתישׂנ for MT יתישׁנ I will forget, cpr. Ez 39,26;
    *Zph 3,18 τίς ἔλαβεν who took-אשׂנ מי? ⋄אשׂנ for MT אתשׂמ the burden (of)?; *Jb 38,14 ἦ σὺ λαβών did you take-שׂהתתפ ⋄שׂתפ? for MT תתהפך ⋄הפך did it change
    Cf. HARL 1991=1992a 152-153; HARLÉ 1988 99.166-167; HELBING 1928, 53; LE BOULLUEC 1989, 245;
    MARGOLIS, M. 1906a=1972 71-74; →TWNT
    (→ἀναλαμβάνω, ἀντιλαμβάνω, ἀπολαμβάνω, διαλαμβάνω, ἐκλαμβάνω, ἐπιλαμβάνω, ἐπικαταλαμβάνω, καταλαμβάνω, μεταλαμβάνω, παραλαμβάνω, περιλαμβάνω, προλαμβάνω, προκαταλαμβάνω, προσλαμβάνω, συλλαμβάνω, συμπαραλαμβάνω, συμπεριλαμβάνω, συναντι-, ὑπολαμβάνω,,)

    Lust (λαγνεία) > λαμβάνω

  • 24 φέρω

    φέρω ([dialect] Locr. [full] φάρω [ᾰ], IG9(1).334.5 (Oeanthea, v. B.C.)), only [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. (late 1 [tense] aor. [ per.] 3pl.
    A

    ἤφεραν IG3.1379

    ), Il.21.458, etc.: [dialect] Ep. forms, [ per.] 2pl. imper.

    φέρτε Il.9.171

    ; [ per.] 2sg. subj.

    φέρῃσθα Call.Dian. 144

    ; [ per.] 3sg. subj.

    φέρῃσι Il.18.308

    , Od.5.164, al.; [dialect] Ep. inf.

    φερέμεν Il.9.411

    , al.: [tense] impf. ἔφερον, [dialect] Ep.

    φέρον 3.245

    ; also φέρεσκε, φέρεσκον ([ per.] 3pl.), Od.9.429, 10.108.
    II [tense] fut.

    οἴσω Il.7.82

    , etc.; [dialect] Dor.

    οἰσῶ Theoc.3.11

    ; [ per.] 1pl.

    οἰσεῦμες Id.15.133

    ; [ per.] 3pl. ηοίσοντι Tab.Heracl.1.150: the foll. act. forms are not [tense] fut. in sense, imper.

    οἶσε Od.22.106

    , 481, Ar.Ach. 1099, 1101, 1122, Ra. 482;

    οἰσέτω Il.19.173

    , Od.8.255; [ per.] 3pl.

    οἰσόντων Antim.15

    ; inf.

    οἴσειν Pi.P.4.102

    , [dialect] Ep.

    οἰσέμεν Od.3.429

    ,

    οἰσέμεναι Il.3.120

    , Od.8.399, etc.: [tense] aor. 1 inf.

    οἶσαι Ph.1.611

     codd. ( ἀν-οῖσαι is prob. in Hdt.1.157):—[voice] Med., [tense] fut.

    οἴσομαι Il.22.217

    , S.El. 969, etc. (in pass. sense, E.Or. 440, X.Oec.18.6; so [dialect] Dor.

    οἰσεῖται Archim.Fluit.1.7

    , al.): [tense] fut. [voice] Pass.

    οἰσθήσομαι D.44.45

    , Arist. Ph. 205a13, Archim.Fluit.1.3, al., ([etym.] ἐξ-) E.Supp. 561:—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf.

    προοῖσται Luc.Par.2

    ; cf. οἰστέον, οἰστός ([etym.] ἀν-οιστός).
    III from ἐνεγκ- (not found in Hom. or Hdt., exc. as v.l. in Il.19.194, but in Pi.O.13.66, I.8(7).21, ([etym.] προς-) Id.P.9.36, also B.16.62, and normal in [dialect] Att. and Trag., also in codd.Hp., Epid.1.1.2, al.) come [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεγκα, and [tense] aor. 2 ἤνεγκον:—Indic., [ per.] 1sg.

    ἤνεγκον S.OC 521

     (lyr.), 964, Ar.Ra. 1299, Th. 742, Lys. 944, ([etym.] δι-) Isoc.18.59, but

    ἤνεγκα S.El. 13

    , E. Ion38, Aeschin.2.4, and in compos. with Preps.; [ per.] 2sg. always

    ἤνεγκας Ar.Av. 540

     (lyr.), ([etym.] ἐξ-) S.Tr. 741 (in Ar.Th. 742, δέκα μῆνας αὔτ' ἐγὼ ἤνεγκον is answd. by ἤνεγκας σύ;); [ per.] 3sg. ἤνεγκε, common to both forms; dual

    δι-ηνεγκάτην Pl.Lg. 723b

    ; pl. always ἠνέγκαμεν, -ατε, -αν ([ per.] 3pl.

    ἀπ-ήνενκαν IG22.1620.37

    , al., once ἀπ-ήνεγκον ib. 1414.2; δι-ηνέγκομεν is f.l. in X.Oec.9.8): imper., [ per.] 2sg.

    ἔνεγκε E. Heracl. 699

    , Ar.Eq. 110, X.Mem.3.6.9 ( ἔνεγκον cj. Pors. in Anaxipp. 8); [ per.] 3sg.

    ἐνεγκάτω Ar. Pax 1149

     (troch.), Th. 238, Pl.Phd. 116d, ([etym.] προς-) X.Smp.5.2; but

    ἐξ-ενεγκέτω IG12.63.33

    , 76.61; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl. ἐνεγκόντω ib.5 (1).26.16 (Amyclae, ii/i B. C.); [ per.] 2pl.

    ἐξ-ενέγκατε Ar.Ra. 847

    : subj. ἐνέγκω common to both forms: opt., [ per.] 1sg.

    ἐνέγκαιμι E.Hipp. 393

    , Pl.Cri. 43c: [ per.] 3sg. ἐνέγκαι (cod.A, but - κοι cod.Laur.) S.Tr. 774, but

    ἐνέγκοι Id.Fr.84

     (anap.), Pl.R. 330a, ([etym.] ξυν-) Th.6.20, etc.; [ per.] 2pl. ἐνέγκαιτε ( ἐνέγκατε codd.) E.Heracl. 751 (lyr.): inf.

    ἐνεγκεῖν A.Supp. 766

    , S.OC 1599, IG22.40.18, etc., ([etym.] προς-) Pi.P.9.36, Hp.VM15; Hellenistic

    ἐνέγκαι Arist.Oec. 1349a27

     ([etym.] εἰς-), PAmh.2.30.35 (ii B. C.), Ev.Marc. 2.4 ([etym.] προς-), etc., found also in codd.Hp., Aff.3 ([etym.] προς-), Nat.Mul.19 ([etym.] δι-): part.

    ἐνεγκών Pi.I.8(7).21

    , S.El. 692, Th.6.56, etc.,

    ἐνέγκας IG22.1361.21

     ([etym.] εἰς-), 333.4, D.49.51 (and later, Demetr.Com.Nov.1.10 ([etym.] εἰς-), Arist.Oec. 1351a14, etc.; in X. we find

    ἐξ-ενεγκόντες Mem.1.2.53

    , and δι-ενεγκοῦσα, συν-ενεγκόντες, vv. ll. in ib.2.2.5, An.6.5.6):— [voice] Med., only ἠνεγκάμην, Ar.Ec.76 ([etym.] ἐξ-), etc. (exc. imper.

    ἐνεγκοῦ S.OC 470

    ); [ per.] 2sg.

    ἠνέγκω E.Supp. 583

    , X.Oec.7.13; [ per.] 3sg.

    ἠνέγκατο S.Tr. 462

    , Pl.R. 406b, etc.; [ per.] 1pl.

    ἠνεγκάμεθα Id. Ion 530b

    , ([etym.] προ-) Phlb. 57a; inf.

    εἰς-ενέγκασθαι Isoc.15.188

    : part.

    ἐνεγκάμενος Aeschin.1.131

    , ([etym.] ἀπ-) X.Ages.6.2.
    IV from ἐνεικ- comes [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεικα, found mostly in [dialect] Ion. (but not in codd. Hp.), [dialect] Ep. and Lyr., also at Cos (v. infr.) and implied elsewh. in pass. forms (v. infr. v):—the endings are those of [tense] aor. 1, exc. in imper.

    ἔνεικε Od.21.178

    , inf. ἐνεικέμεν (v.l. ἐνεγκέμεν) Il.19.194, ἐνείκην (v. infr.), and part. μετ-ενεικών, ἐξενικοῦσι (v. infr.), cf. συνενείκομαι:—[ per.] 1sg.

    ἀν-ένεικα Od.11.625

    ; [ per.] 2sg.

    ἀπ-ένεικας Il.14.255

    ; [ per.] 3sg.

    ἤνεικε Od.18.300

    , al., Hdt.2.146, [dialect] Ep.

    ἔνεικε Il.15.705

    , al.; [ per.] 1pl.

    ἐνείκαμεν Od.24.43

    ; [ per.] 3pl.

    ἤνεικαν Hdt.3.30

    , [dialect] Ep.

    ἔνεικαν Il.9.306

    ; imper. [ per.] 2sg.

    ἔνεικον Anacr.62.3

    ; [ per.] 2pl.,

    ἐνείκατε Od. 8.393

    ; [ per.] 3pl.

    ἐνεικάντων Schwyzer 688

     B 3 (Chios, v B. C.); inf.

    ἐνεῖκαι Il.18.334

    , Pi.P.9.53, Hdt.1.32; ἐνεικέμεν (v. supr.); [dialect] Aeol.

    ἐνείκην Alc.Oxy.1788

     Fr.15ii 20; part.

    ἐνείκας Il.17.39

    , ([etym.] ἀν-) Hdt.2.23;

    μετ-ενεικών Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).22

     (Cos, iii B. C.):—[voice] Med., [ per.] 3sg.

    ἀν-ενείκατο Il.19.314

    ; [ per.] 3pl.

    ἠνείκαντο 9.127

    , Hdt.1.57, ([etym.] ἐς-) 7.152; part.

    ἐνεικάμενος Alc.35.4

    .
    2 [tense] aor. 1 ἤνῐκα is found in the foll. dialect forms: [ per.] 3sg.

    ἤνικε IG42(1).121.110

     (Epid., iv B. C.);

    ἤνικεν SIG239

     Bi11 (Delph., iv B. C.);

    ἀν-ήνικε IG4.757A12

    , al. (Troezen, ii B. C.); ἀπ-ήνικε ib.42(1).103.16, al. (Epid., iv B. C.); but ἤνῑκε is prob. written for ἤνεικε in IG4.801.3 (Troezen, vi B. C.); [ per.] 1pl. ἀν-ηνίκαμες [ῐ] GDI 3591b21 ([place name] Calymna); [ per.] 3pl.

    ἤνικαν SIG239

     Bi 17 (Delph., iv B. C.), IG 12(2).15.15 (Mytil., iii B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj.

    ἐνίκει Berl.Sitzb.1927.161

     ([place name] Cyrene); ἐς-ενίκη, and inf. ἐς-ένικαι, IG12(2).645b43,39 (Nesus, iv B. C.); part. (dat. pl.)

    ἐξ-ενικοῦσι IG4.823.49

     (Troezen, iv B. C.); so in later Gr.,

    εἰς-ήνικα Supp.Epigr.7.381

    ,382 (Dura-Europos, iii A. D.); ἤνιγκα ib.383 (ibid., iii A. D.):—[voice] Med., part.

    ἐξ-ε[νικ]άμενος IG12

     (2).526a5 (Eresus, iv B. C.).
    b [dialect] Boeot. [tense] aor. 1 in [ per.] 3pl.

    εἴνιξαν IG7.2418.24

     (Thebes, iv B. C.); [ per.] 1sg. ἤνειγξα Hdn.Gr.2.374.
    V other tenses: [tense] pf.

    ἐνήνοχα D.21.108

    , 22.62, ([etym.] ἐξ-) Luc.Pr.Im.15,17, ([etym.] μετ-) Pl.Criti. 113a, ([etym.] συν-) v. l. in X.Mem.3.5.22:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.

    ἐνεχθήσομαι Arist.Ph. 205b12

    , Archim.Fluit.2.2, al., ([etym.] ἐπ-) Th.7.56, ([etym.] κατ-) Isoc.13.19: [tense] aor.

    ἠνέχθην X.An.4.7.12

     and freq. in compds.; [dialect] Ion.

    ἀπ-ηνείχθην Hdt.1.66

    , etc.; ([etym.] περι-) ib.84; [ per.] 3pl. written ἠνείχτθησαν in Schwyzer 707B9 (Ephesus, vi B. C.); [dialect] Dor. part.

    ἐξ-ενειχθείς IG42(1).121.115

     (Epid., iv B. C.); Hellenistic

    ἐνεγχθείς PCair.Zen.327.42

     (iii B. C.), ([etym.] συμπερι-) IPE12.32A31,78, B70 (Olbia, iii B. C.); in dialects, [ per.] 3sg. indic.

    ἀπ-ηνίχθη IG42(1).103.111

     (Epid., iv B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj. ἐξενιχθῇ ib.12(5).593 A23 (Ceos, v B. C.), Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).21 (Cos, iii B. C.); [dialect] Boeot.

    ἐν-ενιχθεῖ IG7.3172.150

     (Thespiae, iii B. C.); part. (neut.)

    ἐπ-ενιχθέν Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).53

     (Telos, iv B. C., ined.); [dialect] Att. [tense] pf.

    ἐνήνεγμαι, ἐνήνεκται Pl.R. 584d

    ,

    εἰς-ενήνεκται E. Ion 1340

    ;

    ἀν-ενήνεγκται IG12.91.4

    ; ἐπαν-ενήνειγκται ib.22.1607a7; [dialect] Ion.

    ἐξ-ενηνειγμένος Hdt.8.37

    ; [dialect] Att. [tense] plpf.

    προς-ενήνεκτο X.HG4.3.20

    ; part.

    κατ-, μετ-ενηνεγμένος Plb.10.30.2

    , Str.13.1.12. (With φέρω cf. Lat.fero, OE. beran, Skt. bhárati 'bear'; οἴσω is of uncertain origin; ἐνεγκ- is prob. redupl. ἐγκ- ( ἐνεκ- in [voice] Pass. forms and in δουρηνεκής, etc.), cogn. with Skt. náśati 'attain,' Lat. nanciscor, Lith. nèšti 'carry, bear'; ἐνεικ- ([etym.] ἐνῐκ-) is of uncertain origin; the glosses ἐνέεικαν· ἤνεγκαν, and ἐνεείκω· ἐνέγκω (Hsch.) are not corroborated.)
    A [voice] Act.,
    I bear or carry a load,

    ἐν ταλάροισι φέρον μελιηδέα καρπόν Il.18.568

    ;

    μέγα ἔργον, ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303

    ;

    ἦγον μὲν μῆλα, φέρον δ' εὐήνορα οἶνον Od.4.622

    ;

    χοάς A.Ch.15

    ;

    φ. ἐπ' ὤμοις S.Tr. 564

    ;

    χερσὶν φ. Id.Ant. 429

    ;

    φ. ὅπλα βραχίονι E.Hec.14

    ; bear (as a device) on one's shield, A.Th. 559, etc.; γαστέρι κοῦρον φ., of a pregnant woman, Il.6.59; φ. ὑπὸ ζώνην or ζώνης ὕπο, A.Ch. 1000(992), E.Hec. 762: in Trag. stronger than ἔχω, ἁγνὰς αἵματος χεῖρας φ. to have hands clean from blood, E.Hipp. 316 (v.l. φορεῖς)

    ; ἀλαὸν ὄμμα φέρων Id.Ph. 1531

     (lyr.);

    γλῶσσαν εὔφημον φ. A.Ch. 581

    , cf. Supp. 994;

    καλὸν φ. στόμα S.Fr. 930

     codd. (nisi leg. φορῇ) ; ἄψοφον

    βάσιν φ. Id.Tr. 967

     (lyr.).
    II bear, convey, with collat. notion of motion, freq. in Hom.,

    πῇ δὴ.. τόξα φέρεις; Od.21.362

    ; πρόσω φ. ib. 369;

    εἴσω φέρω σ' ἐντεῦθεν Ar.V. 1444

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 914b;

    πόδες φέρον Il.6.514

    ;

    πέδιλα τά μιν φέρον 24.341

    , etc.; of horses, 2.838;

    ἵππω.. ἅρμα οἴσετον 5.232

    , etc.; of ships, Od.16.323, cf. Il.9.306;

    τὰ σώματα τῶν ζῴων συνέστηκεν ἐκ τοῦ φέροντος καὶ τοῦ φερομένου Diocl. Fr.17

    .
    b of persons, bring to bear, μένος or μένος χειρῶν ἰθύς τινος φέρειν hurl one's strength right upon or against him, Il.16.602, 5.506; φ. τὴν ὀργήν, τὴν αἰτίαν ἐπί τινα, Plb.21.31.8, 33.11.2.
    c lead, direct,

    τὴν πόλιν Plu.Luc.6

    .
    2 of wind, bear along, [

    πνοιὴ Ζεφύρου] φ. νῆάς τε καὶ αὐτούς Od.10.26

    ; [

    σχεδίην] ἄνεμοι φέρον ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα 5.330

    , cf. 4.516, Il.19.378, etc.;

    ἐπέλασσε φέρων ἄνεμος Od.3.300

    , 7.277, cf. 5.111, etc.: abs., ὁ βορέας ἔξω τοῦ Πόντου εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φέρει is fair for Greece, X.An.5.77: metaph.,

    ὅπῃ ἂν ὁ λόγος ὥσπερ πνεῦμα φ. Pl.R. 394d

    ;

    φ. τινὰ φρένες δύσαρκτοι A.Ch. 1023

    , cf. Th. 687 (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., v. infr. B.
    III endure, suffer,

    λυγρά Od.18.135

    ;

    ἄτην Hdt.1.32

    ; χαλινόν, ζυγόν, A.Ag. 1066, 1226; πημονάς, τύχας, Id.Pers. 293, E.Or. 1024;

    ξυμφοράς Th.2.60

    ;

    τὰς οὐ προσηκούσας ἁμαρτίας Antipho 3.2.10

    ; also of food,

    ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φ. X.Cyr.8.2.21

    ; of strong wine, bear, admit, καὶ τὰ τρία φέρων καλῶς, i.e. three parts of water, instead of ἴσον ἴσῳ, Ar.Eq. 1188, cf. Ach. 354; so τὰς ἐπιδείξεις.. φέρουσιν αὐτοῦ (sc. Ἰσοκράτους)

    οἱ λόγοι, τοὺς δὲ ἐν ἐκκλησίαις.. ἀγῶνας οὐχ ὑπομένουσι D.H.Isoc.2

    : metaph.,

    ᾗ φέρειν πέφυκε Pl.Ti. 48a

    .
    2 freq. with modal words,

    πήματα κόσμῳ φ. Pi.P.3.82

    ;

    σιγῇ κακά E.Hec. 738

    ;

    ὀργῇ τὸν πόλεμον Th.1.31

    ;

    θυμῷ φ. Id.5.80

    ;

    χαρᾷ φ. τι J.AJ19.1.13

    : esp. with an Adv., [

    ὕβριν] ῥηϊδίως φ. Hes.Op. 215

    ; δεινῶς, βαρέως, πικρῶς, χαλεπῶς φέρειν τι, bear a thing impatiently, take it ill or amiss, Hdt.2.121.γ, 5.19, E. Ion 610, Pl.R. 330a, etc.; δυσπετῶς, βαρυστόνως φ., A.Pr. 752, Eu. 794; προθύμως φέρειν τὸν πόλεμον to be zealous about the war, Hdt.9.18,40;

    προθύμως τὰ τοῦ πολέμου ἔφερον Th.8.36

    ;

    αἶσαν φέρειν ὡς ῥᾷστα A.Pr. 104

    ;

    συμφορὴν ὡς κουφότατα φ. Hdt.1.35

    ;

    ῥᾳδίως φ. Pl.Grg. 522d

    , al.;

    εὐπετῶς φ. S.Fr. 585

    , X.Mem.2.1.6; εὐπόρως ( εὐφόρως Brunck)

    ἐνεγκεῖν S.Ph. 873

    ; εὐμενῶς, εὐχερῶς φ., D.Ep. 3.45, Pl.R. 474e; these phrases are used mostly c. acc. rei; also c. part.,

    βαρέως ἤνεικε ἰδών Hdt.3.155

    , cf. Ar.Th. 385, etc.;

    φ. ἐλαφρῶς.. λαβόντα ζυγόν Pi.P.2.93

    ;

    ῥᾳδίως φέρεις ἡμᾶς ἀπολείπων Pl. Phd. 63a

    : c. gen.,

    τοῦ ἐνδεοῦς χαλεπώτερον φ. Th.1.77

    , cf. 2.62;

    ἐπί τινι, χαλεπῶς φ. ἐπὶ τῇ πολιορκίᾳ X.HG7.4.21

    , cf. Isoc.12.232;

    πράως ἐπὶ τοῖς γιγνομένοις φ. D.58.55

    : c. dat. only, βαρέως φέρειν τοῖς παροῦσι, τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ, X.An.1.3.3, HG3.4.9, cf. 5.1.29; later, χαλεπῶς φ. διά τι, πρός τι, D.S.17.111, Jul.Or.1.17c codd.
    IV bring, fetch,

    εἰ.. θεὸς αὐτὸν ἐνείκαι Od.21.196

    ;

    φ. ἄποινα Il.24.502

    ;

    ἄρνε 3

    , 120, cf. Sapph.95; ὕδωρ, οἶνον, Anacr.62.1;

    ἔντεα Il.18.191

    ;

    τόξα Od.21.359

    ;

    κνημῖδας A.Th. 675

    ;

    δᾷδα Ar.Nu. 1490

    , etc.;

    γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ Hdt.7.131

    :—[voice] Med., carry or bring with one, or for one's own use,

    ποδάνιπτρα Od.19.504

    ;

    οἶνον Alc.35

    , cf. Hdt.4.67, 7.50, X. Mem.3.14.1;

    φερνὰς δόμοις E.Andr. 1282

    ; fetch, Od.2.410;

    χοὰς ἐκ κρήνης S.OC 470

    .
    2 bring, offer, present,

    δῶρα Od.8.428

    , etc.;

    μέλος Pi.P.2.3

    ;

    χοάς τινι A.Ch. 487

    ;

    φ. πέπλον δώρημά τινι S.Tr. 602

    ;

    πρός τινα δῶρα X.An.7.3.31

    ; χάριν τινὶ φ. grant any one a favour, do him a kindness, Il.5.211, Od.5.307, al.;

    ἐπὶ ἦρα φ. τινί Il.1.572

    , Od.3.164, etc.; φ. τισὶ εὐνοίας, ὄνησιν ἀστοῖς, A.Supp. 489, S.OC 287; but after Hom., χάριν τινὶ φ. show gratitude to him, Pi.O.10(11).17; μῆνιν φ. τινί cherish wrath against.. A.Niob. in PSI11.1208.12.
    b = ἄγω iv. 1,

    ἄχρι νῦν καθ' ὥραν ἔτους λέγονται πένθος ἐπὶ Μελεάγρῳ φέρειν Ant.Lib.2.7

    ; Ἰάλεμος· ὁ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀπολωλόσιν ἀνίαν φέρων, Suid.:—[voice] Med.,

    τοῦ γονέως ἐφ' ᾧ γε τὸ πένθος φέρεσθε Phalar.Ep.103.1

    .
    3 bring, produce, cause, [

    ἀστὴρ] φέρει πυρετὸν βροτοῖσιν Il.22.31

    ;

    ὄσσαν.. ἥ τε φ. κλέος ἀνθρώποισι Od.1.283

    , cf. 3.204; φ. κακόν, πῆμα, ἄλγεα, etc., work one woe, Il.8.541, Od.12.231, 427, etc.; δηϊοτῆτα φ. bring war, 6.203;

    ἐπ' ἀλλήλοισι φ. Ἄρηα Il.3.132

    , cf. 8.516;

    πόλεμον Hes.Sc. 150

    ;

    θάνατον φ. B.5.134

    ;

    τοῦτο εὐδοξίαν σοι οἴσει Pl.Ep. 312c

    ;

    τὸ σωθῆναι τὸ ψεῦδος φέρει S.Ph. 109

    ;

    τέχναι.. φόβον φέρουσιν μαθεῖν A.Ag. 1135

     (lyr.); ὥσπερ τὸ δίκαιον ἔφερε as justice brought with it, brought about, i.e. as was just, no more than just, Hdt.5.58;

    ἀν' ὄ κα φέρῃ ὁ λόγος ὁ ταμία Φιλοκλέος IG42(1).77.13

     (Epid., ii B. C.); of a calculation, yield a result, Vett.Val.349.27; produce, adduce, bring forward,

    παραδείγματα Isoc.7.6

    , etc.;

    πάσας αἰτίας D.58.22

    ;

    ἁρμόττουσαν εἰκόνα Id.61.10

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    εἰς τὴν συνηγορίαν.. τοιαῦτά τινα φέρεται Sor.2.3

    .
    b bring or carry with one, involve,

    τὸ πᾶν ἡμῖν τοῦ πολέμου φέρουσιν αἱ νέες Hdt.8.62

    ; οὐ ξύλων ἀγὼν ὁ τὸ πᾶν φέρων ἐστὶ ἡμῖν, ἀλλ' ἀνδρῶν ib. 100.
    4 μῦθον φ. τινί bring one word, Il.10.288, 15.202; ἀγγελίην φ. bring a message, ib. 175, Od.1.408;

    λόγον Pi.P.8.38

    ;

    ἐπιστολὰς φ. τινί S.Aj. 781

    , cf. Tr. 493;

    ἐπιστολήν X.Ages.8.3

    : hence, tell, announce, πευθώ, φάτιν, A.Th. 370, Ag.9;

    σαφές τι πρᾶγος Id.Pers. 248

     (troch.), cf. Ag. 639, etc.; report, ἀγήν (breakages) PCair.Zen. 15r27 (iii B. C.); φ. κεχωνευκώς reports that he has.., ib.741.26, cf. 147.4, 268.24 (all iii B. C.); enter, book a payment made, PBaden47.12:—[voice] Med.,

    λόγους φ. E.Supp. 583

    ; but also ἀγγελίας ἔπος οἴσῃ thou shalt have it brought thee, receive, Id.Ph. 1546 (lyr.);

    μαντήϊα.. φέρονται Hes.Fr.134.9

    :—[voice] Pass., θάνατον ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου the death of the testator must be announced, Ep.Heb.9.16.
    5 pay something due or owing, φόρον τέσσαρα τάλαντα φ. pay as a tax or tribute, Th.4.57, cf. IG12.57.9, Pl.Plt. 298a, PCair.Zen.467.7 (iii B. C.);

    δασμόν X.An.5.5.10

    ; σύνοδον φ. subscribe to the expense of a meeting, IG22.1012.14, 1326.6;

    χρήματα πᾶσι τάξαντες φ. Th.1.19

    ;

    μισθὸν φ. X.Cyr.1.6.12

     (but usu., receive, draw, pay,

    μισθὸν δύο δραχμὰς τῆς ἡμέρας Ar.Ach.66

    ;

    τέτταρας τῆς ἡμέρας ὀβολοὺς φέρων Men.357

    ;

    αἱ νῆες μισθὸν ἔφερον Th. 3.17

    , cf. X.An.1.3.21, Oec.1.6);

    φ. ἐννέα ὀβολοὺς τῆς μνᾶς τόκους Lys.Fr.1.2

    , cf. Lycurg.23; also of property, bring in, yield as rent,

    φ. μίσθωσιν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ Is.5.35

    .
    6 apply, refer,

    τι ἐπί τι Pl. Ti. 37e

    , Chrm. 163d, R. 478b, cf. Plb.3.36.7, al.; φ. τὰ πράγματα ἐπί τινα confer powers upon, Id.2.50.6.
    7 ψῆφον φ. give one's vote, A.Eu. 674, 680, And.1.2, Is.11.18; ψῆφος καθ' ἡμῶν οἴσεται ([voice] Pass.) E.Or. 440;

    περὶ ταύτης ἡ ψῆφος οἰσθήσεται D.44.45

    ;

    ὑπὲρ ἀγῶνος Lycurg.7

    , cf. 11: hence φ. τινά appoint or nominate to an office,

    φ. χορηγόν D.20.130

    , 39.7, cf. Pl.Lg. 753d, Arist.Pol. 1266a10:—[voice] Pass., ibid.;

    ὅπως φέρηται ἐν τῷ στρατιωτικῷ UPZ15.10

     (ii B. C.);

    τῶν φερομένων ἐν Κλεοπάτρᾳ κληρούχων PRein.10.13

    , al. (ii B. C.); φερομένου μου ἐν τῇ συνοχῇ since I am enrolled in prison, i.e. am in prison, BGU1821.21 (i B. C.):—[voice] Med., choose, adopt,

    ταύταν φ. βιοτάν E.Andr. 785

     (lyr.).
    V bring forth, produce, whether of the earth or of trees,

    φ. ἄρουρα φάρμακα Od.4.229

    ;

    ἄμπελοι φ. οἶνον 9.110

    ; [νῆσος] φ. ὥρια πάντα ib. 131, cf. Hes.Op. 117; [

    οὐ] γῆ καρπὸν ἔφερε Hdt.6.139

    ;

    γύαι φ. βίοτον A.Fr.196.5

    , cf. Pi.N.11.41, E.Hec. 593, etc.: abs., bear fruit, be fruitful,

    εὖτ' ἂν τάδε πάντα φέρῃσι h.Merc.91

    ; ἡ γῆ ἔφερε ( καρπόν add. codd. quidam) Hdt.5.82;

    αἱ ἄμπελοι φέρουσιν X.Oec.20.4

    ; also of living beings,

    τόπος ἄνδρας φ. Pl.Ti. 24c

    ;

    ἤνεγκεν αὐτὸν Λαοδίκεια Philostr. VS1.25.1

    ;

    ἡ ἐνεγκοῦσα

     one's country,

    Hld.2.29

    , Lib.Or. 2.66, al., Chor.p.81 B., Lyd.Mag.3.26, dub. in Supp.Epigr.4.439 (Milet.) without Art. (also

    ἡ ἐνεγκαμένη Jul.Ep. 202

    ); or Mother Earth, M.Ant.4.48: generally, create, form,

    Πηνειὸς Τέμπη φ. Philostr.Im.1.25

    ; [

    τὰ βρέφη] ἄρχεται φέρειν τοὺς ὀδόντας Aët.4.9

    ;

    φ. τοὺς κυνόδοντας Gp.16.1.14

    .
    VI carry off or away,

    Κῆρες ἔβαν θανάτοιο φέρουσαι Il.2.302

    ;

    φ. τινὰ ἐκ πόνου 14.429

    , 17.718, etc.; of winds, [ἔπος] φέροιεν ἀναρπάξασαι ἄελλαι may the winds sweep away the word, Od.8.409; of a river, Hdt.1.189:—[voice] Med., carry off with one, Od.15.19.
    2 carry away as booty or prize, ἔναρα, τεύχεα, Il.6.480, 17.70;

    αἶγα λέοντε φ. 13.199

    ; δεῖπνον φ., of Harpies, A.Eu.51;

    ἐνέχυρα βίᾳ φ. Antipho 6.11

    ; in the phrase φέρειν καὶ ἄγειν (cf.

    ἄγω 1.3

    ), IG12.69.19; φέροντα ἢ ἄγοντα Lex ap.D.23.60;

    αἴ κα.. ἄγῃ ἢ φέρῃ Leg.Gort.5.37

    ;

    ἥρπαζον καὶ ἔφερον Lys.20.17

    ;

    κείρων ἢ φέρων IG12(9).90.10

     (Tamynae, iv B. C.);

    αἴ τίς κα.. φέρει τι τῶν ἐν τᾷ ἱαρᾷ γᾷ Tab.Heracl.1.128

    ; of a divorced wife,

    αἰ δέ τι ἄλλο φέροι τῶ ἀνδρός, πέντε στατῆρανς καταστασεῖ κὤτι κα φέρῃ αὐτόν Leg.Gort.3.2

    ; φέρειν alone, rob, plunder,

    θεῶν ἱερά E.Hec. 804

    ;

    ἀλλήλους Th.1.7

    ; abs., SIG38.23 (Teos, v B. C.):—[voice] Pass.,

    φερόμενοι Βακχῶν ὕπο E.Ba. 759

    :—[voice] Med. in same sense,

    ἔναρα Il.22.245

    ;

    πελέκεας οἶκόνδε φ. 23.856

    ;

    ἀτερπέα δαῖτα Od.10.124

    , cf. 15.378.
    3 carry off, gain, esp. by toil or trouble, win, achieve, both [voice] Act. and [voice] Med.,

    ἤ κε φέρῃσι μέγα κράτος ἦ κε φεροίμην Il.18.308

    ;

    φέρειν τρίποδα Hes.Op. 657

    ;

    τἀπινίκια S.El. 692

    ;

    τιμήν Ar. Av. 1278

    ; τἀριστεῖα, τὰ νικητήρια, Pl.R. 468c, Lg. 657e;

    πέρα.. οὐδὲν φ. S.OC 651

    ;

    ἐκ σοῦ πάντ' ἄνευ φόβου φ. Id.OT 590

    ; τίς.. πλέον τᾶς εὐδαιμονίας φέρει ἤ .. ; ib. 1190 (lyr.), cf. El. 1088 (lyr.); in bad sense,

    μείζω τὴν αἰσχύνην φ. Pl.Lg. 671e

    : also, receive one's due,

    φ. χάριν S.OT 764

    ;

    ὡς τοῦτό γ' ἔρξας δύο φέρῃ δωρήματα Id.Ph. 117

    ; μισθὸν φέρειν (v. supr. iv.5); of a priest's perquisites,

    φέρει ὁ ἱαρεὺς γέρη σκέλη κτλ. BMus.Inscr.968

     A 9 ([place name] Cos), cf. IG12.24.10, al., SIG56.35 (Argos, v B. C.):—[voice] Med. (v. ad init.), win for oneself,

    κῦδος οἴσεσθαι Il.22.217

    ; δέπας, τεύχεα, carry off as a prize, 23.663, 809, al.; ἀέθλια or ἄεθλον φ. carry off, win a prize, 9.127, 23.413; τὰ πρῶτα φέρεσθαι (sc. ἄεθλα) 23.275, 538;

    οὐ σμικρὸν ἆθλον τῆς ἐρωτικῆς μανίας φέρονται Pl.Phdr. 256d

    ; of perquisites, τὸ.. σκέλος τοὶ ἱαρομνάμονες φερόσθω (i. e. φερούσθω from Φερόνσθω) IG42(1).40.13 (Epid., v/iv B. C.): hence

    οὐ τὰ δεύτερα Hdt.8.104

    ; πλέον φέρεσθαι get more or a larger share for onself, gain the advantage over any one, τινος Hdt.7.211, cf. S.OT 500 (lyr.), E.Hec. 308; ταῦτα ἐπὶ σμικρόν τι ἐφέροντο τοῦ πολέμου this they received as a small help towards the war, Hdt.4.129;

    ἠνείκατο παρὰ Ἐγεσταίων τὰ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος 5.47

    ;

    ἴδια κέρδεα προσδεκόμενοι παρὰ τοῦ Πέρσεω οἴσεσθαι 6.100

    ;

    χάριν φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῶν And.2.9

    ;

    φ. τὴν ἀπέχθειαν αὐτῶν Antipho 3.4.2

    ;

    ὀνείδη Pl.Lg. 762a

    ;

    εὐσέβειαν ἐκ πατρὸς οἴσῃ S.El. 969

    ;

    δάκρυ πρὸς τῶν κλυόντων A.Pr. 638

    ;

    ἀπό τινος βοσκάν Id.Eu. 266

     (lyr.);

    ἐξ ἀνανδρίας τοὔνομα Aeschin.1.131

    : generally, get for one's own use and profit, take and carry away, esp. to one's own home,

    τοῦ.. πάμπρωτα παρ' ἀγλαὰ δῶρα φέροιο Il.4.97

    : hence φέρειν or φέρεσθαι is often used pleon., v. infr. xi.
    VII abs., of roads or ways, lead to a place,

    ὁδὸν φέρουσαν ἐς ἱρόν Hdt.2.122

    , cf. 138; τὴν φέρουσαν ἄνω (sc. ὁδόν) Id.9.69;

    τῆς μὲν ἐς ἀριστερὴν ἐπὶ Καρίης φ., τῆς δὲ ἐς δεξιὴν ἐς Σάρδις Id.7.31

    ;

    ἐπὶ Σοῦσα X.An.3.5.15

    ;

    ἁπλῆ οἶμος εἰς Ἅιδου φέρει A.Fr. 239

    ;

    ἡ ἐς Θήβας φέρουσα ὁδός Th.3.24

     (but ἡ ἐπ' Ἀθηνῶν φέρουσα ibid.); also ἡ θύρα ἡ εἰς τὸν κῆπον φ. the door leading to the garden, D.47.53; αἱ εἰς τὴν πόλιν φ. πύλαι, αἱ ἐπὶ τὸ τεῖχος φ. κλίμακες, X.HG7.2.7, cf. PMich.Zen.38.27 (iii B. C.), Plb.10.12.3.
    b of time,

    τῇ νυκτὶ τῇ φερούσῃ εἰς τὴν β τοῦ Παχών PPetr.3p

    .x (iii B. C.), cf. PTeb.61 (b) 288 (ii B. C.), BGU1832.5 (i B. C.), etc.
    3 metaph., lead to or towards, be conducive to,

    ἐς αἰσχύνην φέρει Hdt.1.10

    ;

    τὰ ἐς ἄκεσιν φέροντα Id.4.90

    ; ἐς βλάβην, ἐς φόβον φέρον, S.OT 517, 991;

    εἰς ὄκνον E.Supp. 295

    : esp. in good sense, tend, conduce to one's interest, ἐπ' ἀμφότερά τοι φέρει (impers.)

    ταῦτα ποιέειν Hdt.3

    . 134; so

    τὰ πρὸς τὸ ὑγιαίνειν φέροντα X.Mem.4.2.31

    ;

    τροφαὶ μέγα φ. εἰς ἀρετάν E.IA 562

    (lyr.); μέγα τι οἰόμεθα φέρειν (sc. κοινωνίαν γυναικῶν τε καὶ παίδων)

    εἰς πολιτείαν Pl.R. 449d

    ; τὰ καλὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα εἰς ἀρετῆς κτῆσιν φ. ib. 444e, cf. X.Cyr.8.1.42; τοῦτο ἔφερεν αὐτῷ was for his good, M.Ant.5.8.
    b point to, refer to a thing,

    ἐς τί ὑμῖν ταῦτα φαίνεται φέρειν; Hdt.1.120

    ; φωνὴ φέρουσα πρός τινα addressed to him, Id.1.159;

    ἐς ἀρηΐους ἀγῶνας φέρον τὸ μαντήϊον Id.9.33

    , cf. 6.19; [ὄψις] φέρει ἐπὶ πᾶσαν γῆν refers to.., extends over.., Id.7.19; τὰ ἴχνη τῆς ὑποψίας εἰς τοῦτον φ. point to him, Antipho 2.3.10;

    πρός τινας Pl.R. 538c

    ;

    ταύτῃ <ὁ> νόος ἔφερε Hdt.9.120

    ; ἡ τοῦ δήμου φέρει γνώμη, ὡς .., the people's opinion inclines to this, that.., Id.4.11;

    ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Th.1.79

    : c. inf., τῶν ἡ γνώμη ἔφερε συμβάλλειν whose opinion inclined to giving battle, Hdt.6.110, cf. 5.118; πλέον ἔφερέ οἱ ἡ γνώμη κατεργάσεσθαι his opinion inclined rather to the view.., Hdt.8.100, cf. 3.77.
    VIII carry or have in the mouth, i. e. speak of,

    πολύν τινα ἐν ταῖς διαβολαῖς φέρειν Aeschin.3.223

    ; use a word,

    οὐκ οἶδα καθ' ὁποτέρου τούτων οἱ παλαιοὶ τὸ τῆς ζειᾶς ἔφερον ὄνομα Gal.Vict.Att.6

    , cf. 7.644, 15.753, 876; record an event,

    οἱ δευτέρῳ μετὰ τὴν ἔξοδον.. ἔτει φέροντες αὐτήν D.H.1.63

    : more freq. in [voice] Pass., πονηρῶς, εὖ, φέρεσθαι, to be ill or well spoken of, X.HG1.5.17, 2.1.6;

    ἀτίμως ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων φ. Pl.Ep. 328e

    ; abs., φέρεται [the report] is carried about, i.e. it is said, c. acc. et inf.,

    τοιόνδε φέρεται πρῆγμα γίνεσθαι Hdt.8.104

     (v.l.); ἐν χρόνοις φέρεται μνημονευομένοις is recorded as occurring within historical times, Str.1.3.15;

    ὅτε καὶ Δημόκριτος φέρεται τελευτήσας Sor.Vit.Hippocr.11

    ;

    κρίνομεν.. τὰ γραφέντα ὑφ' ἡμῶν προστάγματα ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς νόμοις φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῖν OGI331.60

     (Pergam., ii B. C.);

    ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα φέρεται

     are in use,

    Ptol.Geog.7.4.11

    ; of literary works, to be in circulation,

    ἐπιστόλιον αὐτοῦ τοιοῦτον φέρεται Plu.2.808a

    , cf. 209e, 832d, 833c, al., Jul.Or.6.189b, Gp.2.35.8, Eun.VSp.456 B.; πρόλογοι διττοὶ φέρονται Arg.E.Rh.; ὁ στίχος οὗτος ἔν τισιν οὐ φέρεται Sch.E. Ph. 377, cf. Sch.Il.8.557.
    2 of words, φέρεσθαι ἐπί τι to refer to something, A.D.Pron.61.5, Synt.21.14, al.
    IX imper. φέρε like ἄγε, as Adv., come, now, well,
    1 before another imper.,

    φέρε γὰρ σήμαινε A.Pr. 296

     (anap.);

    φέρ' εἰπὲ δή μοι S.Ant. 534

    ;

    φ. δή μοι τόδε εἰπέ Pl.Cra. 385b

    ; so

    φέρετε.. πειρᾶσθε Hdt.4.127

    .
    2 before [ per.] 1sg. or pl. of subj. used imperatively, φέρε ἀκούσω, φέρε στήσωμεν, Hdt.1.11,97;

    φ. δὲ νῦν.. φράσω Id.2.14

    ;

    φέρ' ἴδω, τί δ' ἥσθην; Ar.Ach.4

    ;

    φέρε δὴ κατίδω Id. Pax 361

    , cf. 959; φ. δὴ ἴδωμεν, φ. δὴ σκεψώμεθα, Pl.Grg. 455a, Prt. 330b, cf. E.Or. 1281 (lyr.), Ph. 276, etc.: less freq. before 2 pers.,

    φέρε.. μάθῃς S.Ph. 300

    .
    3 before a rhetorical question,

    φέρε.. τροπαῖα πῶς ἀναστήσεις; E.Ph. 571

    ;

    φ. δὴ νῦν.. τί γαμεῖθ' ἡμᾶς; Ar.Th. 788

     (anap.), cf. Ach. 541, Pl.R. 348c; φ. μῶν οὐκ ἀνάγκη .. ; Id.Lg. 805d; φ. πρὸς θεῶν πῶς .. ; Id.Grg. 514d; freq. in phrase

    φέρε γάρ, φέρε τίς γὰρ οὗτος; Ar.Nu. 218

    ;

    φ. γὰρ πρὸς τίνας χρὴ πολεμεῖν; Isoc.4.183

    , cf. Antipho 5.36; also

    φ. δή Pl.Grg. 455a

    , al.: usu. first in a sentence, but

    τὴν ἀνδρείαν δὲ φ. τί θῶμεν; Id.Lg. 633c

    , etc.
    4 φέρε δή, ἐάν πῃ διαλλαχθῶμεν .. come let us see if we can.., Id.Cra. 430a.
    5 φέρε c. inf., suppose, grant that..

    φ. λέγειν τινά Plu.2.98b

    ; φ. εἰπεῖν let us say, D.Chr.31.93, 163, Porph.Abst.3.3;

    οἷον φ. εἰ. Iamb. in Nic.p.47

     P., al. ( οἷον φέρε alone, Hierocl. in CA11p.439M.).
    X part. neut. τὸ φέρον, as Subst., destiny, fate, τὸ φ. ἐκ θεοῦ [καλῶς] φέρειν [χρή] ye must bear nobly what heaven bears to you, awards you, S.OC 1693 (lyr., codd., sed secl. καλῶς, χρή)

    ; εἰ τὸ φερον σε φέρει, φέρε καὶ φέρου AP 10.73

     (Pall.).
    2 part. φέρων in all genders freq. joined with another Verb:
    a to express a subsidiary action, φέρων ἔδωκε he brought and gave, Od.22.146; δὸς τῷ ξείνῳ ταῦτα φέρων take this and give it him, 17.345; ἔγχος ἔστησε φέρων brought the spear and placed it, 1.127; σῖτον παρέθηκε φέρουσα ib. 139, al., cf. S.Tr. 622;

    τοῦτο ἐλθὼν οἴκαδε φέρων τῷ πατρὶ ἔδωκα Pl.Hp.Ma. 282e

    , cf. R. 345b; so

    ὁ μὲν Ἐπίχαρμον.. εἰς δέκα τόμους φέρων συνήγαγεν Porph.Plot. 24

    ; ἑκάστῃ ἐννεάδι τὰ οἰκεῖα φέρων συνεφόρησα ibid., etc.; sts. translatable by with,

    ᾤχοντο φέροντες τὰ γράμματα Th.7.8

    .
    b intr., in pass. sense, to denote unrestrained action,

    νῦν σε μάλ' οἴω.. φέροντα.. φιλητεύσειν h.Merc. 159

    ; φέρουσα ἐνέβαλε νηΐ φιλίῃ she went and rammed, rammed full tilt, Hdt.8.87; ὅταν ἐπὶ θάτερ' ὥσπερ εἰς τρυτάνην ἀργύριον προσενέγκῃς, οἴχεται φέρον down it sinks, D.5.12;

    τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη τοῦ πολέμου παρῆκαν, φέροντες δὲ παντὶ τῷ στρατεύματι πρὸς αὐτὸν Ἀκράγαντα προσήρεισαν

     hurling themselves,

    Plb.1.17.8

    ;

    εἰς τοῦτο φέρων περιέστησε τὰ πράγματα Aeschin.3.82

    ; ὑπέβαλεν ἑαυτὸν φέρων Θηβαίοις ib.90, cf. 1.175, 3.143,146; in the foll. passages φέρων accompanies a Verb of throwing, giving, entrusting, or dedicating, and expresses wholehearted action, whether wise or unwise; there is always an accus., freq. of the reflex. Pron., governed by the principal Verb (or perh. by φέρων): ἐπεὶ ἐς τοὺς κρατῆρας ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἐνέβαλον (sc. ὁ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς ) when I went (or took) and threw myself.., Luc.Icar.13, cf. Fug.1, Plu.Comp.Arist. Cat.1, Fab.6, Per.12, Paus.1.30.1, Ael.VH8.14, Frr.10,69, Philostr. VA3.4;

    τὴν κατασκευὴν.. φέρων ἐδωρήσατο τῇ μητρί D.S.31.27

    , cf. Ach.Tat.1.7;

    σεαυτὸν.. φέρων ἀπημπόληκας Luc.Merc.Cond.24

    ;

    τί παθόντες.. τοῖς ἀτέκνοις τῶν γερόντων ἐσποιεῖτε φέροντες αὑτούς; Luc. DMort.6.3

    , cf. Ind.19, Laps.22; ταύτῃ (sc. τῇ ὀργῇ)

    φέρων ὑπέθηκεν ἑαυτόν Plu.Them.24

    , cf. Per.7;

    τούτῳ φέροντες ὑποβάλλουσι τοὺς υἱούς Id.2.4b

    , cf. Luc.6, Pomp.27, Ael.VH6.1, Max.Tyr.1.2;

    προσέθετο φέρων ἑαυτὸν ἐκείνῳ Eun.VS p.456

     B., cf.pp.461,465 B., Dam. ap. Suid. s.v. Σεβηριανός; ἀλλὰ σοὶ μὲν, ὦ θεῶν πάτερ, ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἀναθήσω Jul.Or.7.231b.
    3 ἔκκρισις.. ἐκ μικρῶν φέρουσα διαστημάτων occurring at short intervals, Sor.2.45.
    XI φέρειν, φέρεσθαι are freq. added epexegetically to δίδωμι and similar Verbs,

    δῶκεν.. τρίποδα φέρειν Il.23.513

    , cf. 16.665, 17.131;

    τεύχεα.. δότω φέρεσθαι 11.798

    , cf. Od.21.349, E.Tr. 419, 454(troch.).
    B [voice] Pass. is used in most of the above senses:—special cases:
    I to be borne or carried involuntarily, esp. to be borne along by waves or winds, to be swept away, φέρεσθαι ἀνέμοισι, θυέλλῃ, Od.9.82, 10.54, cf. A.Pers. 276 (lyr.), etc.; πᾶν δ' ἦμαρ φερόμην, of Hephaestus falling from Olympus, Il.1.592; ἧκε φέρεσθαι he sent him flying, 21.120; ἧκα πόδας καὶ χεῖρε φέρεσθαι I let go my hands and feet, let them swing free [in the leap], Od.12.442, cf. 19.468; μέγα φέρεται πὰρ σέθεν, of a word uttered, comes with weight, Pi.P.1.87;

    βίᾳ φέρεται Pl.Phdr. 254a

    ;

    πνεῦμα φερόμενον Id.R. 496d

    ;

    τὸ πνεῦμα κατὰ τὰς ἀναπνοὰς εἴσω τε καὶ ἔξω φέρεται Gal.16.520

    ;

    ῥεῖν καὶ φέρεσθαι Pl.Cra. 411c

    ;

    φ. εἰς τὸν Τάρταρον Id.Phd. 114b

    ; simply, move, go,

    ποῖ γᾶς φέρομαι; S.OT 1309

     (anap.);

    οὐκ οἶσθ' ὅποι γῆς οὐδ' ὅποι γνώμης φέρῃ Id.El. 922

    , cf. E.Hec. 1076 (anap.), etc.; of the excreta,

    τὰ φερόμενα.. εἰ μὲν αὐτομάτως φέροιτο Philum.

     ap. Aët.9.12;

    πρὸς κοιλίαν φερομένην Aët.4.19

    : metaph.,

    εἰς τὸ λοιδορεῖν φέρῃ E.Andr. 729

    ;

    πρὸς τὴν τοῦ κάλλους φύσιν Pl.Phdr. 254b

    , cf. X.Mem.2.1.4; ἐπὶ ταὐτὸ φέρονται have the same tendency, Phld.Vit.p.42 J.;

    ἀπὸ δογμάτων καὶ ἀπὸ θεωρημάτων φ. Vett.Val.238.30

    ; of veins, to be conveyed, Gal.15.531; also ἡ φερομένη οὐσία (the doctrine of) universal motion, Pl.Tht. 177c; οἱ φερόμενοι θεοί the moving gods, i. e. the stars and planets, Plot.2.3.9.
    2 freq. in part. with another Verb of motion, φερόμενοι ἐσέπιπτον ἐς τοὺς Αἰγινήτας they fell into their hands with a rush, at full speed, Hdt.8.91;

    ἀπὸ.. ἐλπίδος ᾠχόμην φερόμενος Pl.Phd. 98b

    ;

    ἧκε φερόμενος εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν Aeschin.3.89

    .
    3 of voluntary and impulsive motion,

    ἰθὺς φέρεται μένει Il.20.172

    ; ὁμόσε τινὶ φέρεσθαι come to blows with him, X.Cyn.10.21;

    δρόμῳ φ. πρός τινα Id.HG4.8.37

    ;

    φυγῇ εἰς ἑαυτοὺς φ. Id.Cyr.1.4.23

    ;

    ἥξει ἐπ' ἐκεῖνον τὸν λόγον φερόμενος Lycurg.59

    ;

    φερόμενος ὑπ' ὀργῆς D.H.Comp.18

    .
    II metaph., καλῶς, κακῶς φέρεσθαι, of things, schemes, etc., turn out, prosper well or ill, succeed or fail,

    οὔτ' ἂν.. νόμοι καλῶς φέροιντ' ἄν S.Aj. 1074

    ;

    κακῶς φ. τὰ ἑαυτοῦ X.HG3.4.25

    ;

    εὖ φέρεται ἡ γεωργία Id.Oec.5.17

    ; ὀλιγώρως ἔχειν καὶ ἐᾶν ταῦτα φέρεσθαι to neglect things and let them take their course, D.8.67; less freq. of persons, fare well or ill, εὖ φερόμενος ἐν στρατηγίαις being generally successful.., Th.5.16, cf. 15;

    καλῶς φερόμενος τὸ καθ' ἑαυτόν Id.2.60

    ;

    φ. ἐν προτιμήσει παρά τινι D.S.33.5

    ;

    χεῖρον φερομένη παρὰ τἀδελφῷ J.AJ16.7.6

    ; of euphonious writing,

    σύνθεσις καλῶς φερομένη Phld.Po.5.26

    .
    2 behave, ὑποκριτικῶς, ἀστάτως, etc., Vett.Val.38.20, 197.8, al.
    C [voice] Med.: for its chief usages, v. supr. A. VI. 3.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > φέρω

  • 25 μυστήριον

    μυστήριον, ου, τό ‘secret, secret rite, secret teaching, mystery’ a relig. t.t. (predom. pl.) applied in the Gr-Rom. world mostly to the mysteries w. their secret teachings, relig. and political in nature, concealed within many strange customs and ceremonies. The principal rites remain unknown because of a reluctance in antiquity to divulge them (Trag.+; Hdt. 2, 51, 2; Diod S 1, 29, 3; 3, 63, 2; Socrat., Ep. 27, 3; Cornutus 28 p. 56, 22; 57, 4; Alciphron 3, 26, 1; OGI 331, 54; 528, 13; 721, 2, SIG s. index; Sb 7567, 9 [III A.D.]; PGM 1, 131; 4, 719ff; 2477 τὰ ἱερὰ μ. ἀνθρώποις εἰς γνῶσιν; 5, 110; 12, 331; 13, 128 τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ θεοῦ. Only the perfected gnostic is τῶν μυστηρίων ἀκροατής Hippol., Ref. 5, 8, 29.—OKern, D. griech. Mysterien d. klass. Zeit 1927; WOtto, D. Sinn der eleusin. Myst. ’40; MNilsson, The Dionysiac Mysteries of the Hell. and Rom. Age, ’57; Kl. Pauly III 1533–42; WBurkert, Antike Mysterien ’90). Also LXX and other versions of the OT use the word, as well as En (of the heavenly secret) and numerous pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph. (C. Ap. 2, 189, 266), apolog. (exc. Ar.); it is a loanw. in rabb. Our lit. uses μ. in ref. to the transcendent activity of God and its impact on God’s people.
    ① the unmanifested or private counsel of God, (God’s) secret, the secret thoughts, plans, and dispensations of God (SJCh 78, 9; τὸ μ. τῆς μοναρχίας τῆς κατὰ τὸν θεόν Theoph. Ant. 2, 28 [p. 166, 17]) which are hidden fr. human reason, as well as fr. all other comprehension below the divine level, and await either fulfillment or revelation to those for whom they are intended (the divine Logos as διδάσκαλος θείων μυστηρίων Orig., C. Cels. 3, 62, 9: the constellations as δεῖγμα καὶ τύπον … μεγάλου μυστηρίου Hippol. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 7]; Abraham is τῶν θείων … μέτοχος μυστηρίων Did., Gen. 213, 20).
    ⓐ In the gospels μ. is found only in one context, where Jesus says to the disciples who have asked for an explanation of the parable(s) ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον δέδοται τῆς βασιλείας τ. θεοῦ Mk 4:11; the synopt. parallels have the pl. Mt 13:11 (LCerfaux, NTS 2, ’55/56, 238–49); Lk 8:10.—WWrede, D. Messiasgeh. in den Evv. 1901; HEbeling, D. Messiasgeh. u. d. Botschaft des Mc-Evangelisten ’39; NJohansson, SvTK 16, ’40, 3–38; OPiper, Interpretation 1, ’47, 183–200; RArida, St Vladimar Theol. Qtly 38, ’94, 211–34 (patristic exegesis Mk 4:10–12 par.).
    ⓑ The Pauline lit. has μ. in 21 places. A secret or mystery, too profound for human ingenuity, is God’s reason for the partial hardening of Israel’s heart Ro 11:25 or the transformation of the surviving Christians at the Parousia 1 Cor 15:51. Even Christ, who was understood by so few, is God’s secret or mystery Col 2:2, hidden ages ago 1:26 (cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 16 τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ κεκρυμμένον μυστήριον μέχρι τῆσδε τῆς ἡμέρας), but now gloriously revealed among the gentiles vs. 27, to whom the secret of Christ, i.e. his relevance for them, is proclaimed, 4:3 (CMitton, ET 60, ’48/49, 320f). Cp. Ro 16:25; 1 Cor 2:1 (cp. Just., D. 91, 1; 131, 2 al. μ. τοῦ σταυροῦ; 74, 3 τὸ σωτήριον τοῦτο μ., τοῦτʼ ἔστι τὸ πάθος τοῦ χριστοῦ). The pl. is used to denote Christian preaching by the apostles and teachers in the expr. οἰκονόμοι μυστηρίων θεοῦ 1 Cor 4:1 (Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 23, 104 calls the teachings of Pyth. θεῖα μυστήρια). Not all Christians are capable of understanding all the mysteries. The one who speaks in tongues πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια utters secret truths in the Spirit which the person alone shares w. God, and which others, even Christians, do not understand 1 Cor 14:2. Therefore the possession of all mysteries is a great joy 13:2 (Just., D. 44, 2). And the spirit-filled apostle can say of the highest stage of Christian knowledge, revealed only to the τέλειοι: λαλοῦμεν θεοῦ σοφίαν ἐν μυστηρίῳ we impart the wisdom of God in the form of a mystery (ἐν μυστηρίῳ=in a mysterious manner [Laud. Therap. 11] or =secretly, so that no unauthorized person would learn of it [cp. Cyr. of Scyth. p. 90, 14 ἐν μυστηρίῳ λέγει]) 2:7 (AKlöpper, ZWT 47, 1905, 525–45).—Eph, for which (as well as for Col) μ. is a predominant concept, sees the μ. τοῦ θελήματος αὐτοῦ (sc. θεοῦ) 1:9 or μ. τ. Χριστοῦ 3:4 or μ. τ. εὐαγγελίου 6:19 in acceptance of the gentiles as Christians 3:3ff, 9ff. A unique great mystery is revealed 5:32, where the relation betw. Christ and the Christian community or church is spoken of on the basis of Gen 2:24 (cp. the interpretation of the sun as symbol of God, Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 8], and s. WKnox, St. Paul and the Church of the Gentiles, ’39, 183f; 227f; WBieder, TZ 11, ’55, 329–43).
    ⓒ In Rv μ. is used in ref. to the mysterious things portrayed there. The whole content of the book appears as τὸ μ. τοῦ θεοῦ 10:7. Also τὸ μ. τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀστέρων 1:20; τὸ μ. τῆς γυναικός 17:7, cp. vs. 5, where in each case μ. may mean allegorical significance (so BEaston, Pastoral Epistles ’47, 215).
    ② that which transcends normal understanding, transcendent/ultimate reality, secret, with focus on Israelite/Christian experience.
    ⓐ 1 Ti uses μ. as a formula: τὸ μ. τῆς πίστεως is simply faith 3:9. τὸ τ. εὐσεβείας μ. the secret of (our) piety vs. 16.—τὸ μ. τῆς ἀνομίας 2 Th 2:7 s. ἀνομία 1 (Jos., Bell. 1, 470 calls the life of Antipater κακίας μυστήριον because of his baseness practiced in secret. Cp. also SibOr 8, 58 τὰ πλάνης μυστήρια; 56).—PFurfey, CBQ 8, ’46, 179–91.
    ⓑ in Ign.: the death and resurrection of Jesus as μ. IMg 9:1 (τὸ περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως μ. Orig., C. Cels. 1, 7, 9). The virginity of Mary, her childbearing, and the Lord’s death are called τρία μ. κραυγῆς three mysteries (to be) loudly proclaimed IEph 19:1 (they are mysteries because they go so contrary to human expectation). So also of the annunciation to Mary and her conception GJs 12:2f. The deacons are οἱ διάκονοι μυστηρίων Ἰ. Χρ. ITr 2:3.
    ⓒ Quite difficult is the saying about the tried and true prophet ποιῶν εἰς μυστήριον κοσμικὸν ἐκκλησίας who acts in accord with the earthly mystery of (God’s) assembly D 11:11. This may refer to celibacy; the prophet lives in such a way as to correspond to the relation betw. Christ and the people of God; cp. Eph 5:32 (so Harnack, TU II 1; 2, 1884, 44ff; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen d. Geistes u. der Geister 1899, 131–38; PDrews, Hdb. z. d. ntl. Apokryphen 1904, 274ff; RKnopf, Hdb. ad loc.—Differently CTaylor, The Teaching of the Twelve Apost. 1886, 82–92; RHarris, The Teaching of the Ap. 1887; FFunk, Patr. Apostol.2 1901 ad loc.; Zahn, Forschungen III 1884, 301).
    ⓓ μ. occurs oft. in Dg: τὸ τῆς θεοσεβείας μ. the secret of (our) piety 4:6 (what Dg means by μ. is detailed in ch. 5). Likew. of Christian teaching (cp. Ps.-Phocyl. 229 and comments by Horst 260–61) πατρὸς μυστήρια 11:2; cp. vs. 5. Hence the Christian can μυστήρια θεοῦ λαλεῖν 10:7. In contrast to ἀνθρώπινα μ. 7:1. οὗ (sc. τ. θεοῦ) τὰ μυστήρια whose secret counsels 7:2 (the divine will for orderly management of the universe). Of God keeping personal counsel κατεῖχεν ἐν μυστηρίῳ … τὴν σοφὴν αὐτοῦ βουλήν 8:10.—Lghtf., St. Paul’s Ep. to the Col. and Phlm. p. 167ff; JRobinson, St. Paul’s Ep. to the Eph. 1904, 234ff; GWobbermin, Religionsgesch. Studien 1896, 144ff; EHatch, Essays on Bibl. Gk. 1889, 57ff; HvSoden, ZNW 12, 1911, 188ff; TFoster, AJT 19, 1915, 402–15; OCasel, D. Liturgie als Mysterienfeier5 1923; JSchneider, ‘Mysterion’ im NT: StKr 104, ’32, 255–78; TArvedson, D. Mysterium Christi ’37; KPrümm, ‘Mysterion’ v. Pls bis Orig.: ZKT 61, ’37, 391–425, Biblica 37, ’56, 135–61; RBrown, The Semitic Background of ‘Mystery’ in the NT, ’68; cp. KKuhn, NTS 7, 61, 366 for Qumran parallels to various passages in Eph and Ro; ABöhlig, Mysterion u. Wahrheit, ’68, 3–40; JFruytier, Het woord M. in de catechesen van Cyrillus van Jerusalem, ’50; ANock, Hellenistic Mysteries and Christian Sacraments, Essays on Religion and the Ancient World II, ’72, 790–820; AHarvey, The Use of Mystery Language in the Bible: JTS 31, ’80, 320–36.—DELG s.v. μύω. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μυστήριον

  • 26 τίς

    τίς, τί gen. τίνος, dat. τίνι, acc. τίνα, τί (Hom.+) interrogative pron. in direct, indirect and rhetorical questions (W-S. §25, 1ff; B-D-F §298f, al.; Rob. 735–40 al.)
    ① an interrogative ref. to someone or someth., who? which (one)? what?
    ⓐ as subst.
    α. τίς;
    א. who? which one? τίς ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν; Mt 3:7; Lk 3:7. τίς ἐστιν ὁ παίσας σε; Mt 26:68 (FNeirynck, ETL 63, 5–47; RBrown, The Death of the Messiah ’94, II 578–80). τίνος υἱός ἐστιν; whose son is he? 22:42b. τίνα λέγουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι εἶναι τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου; 16:13. Cp. Mk 11:28; 12:16; 16:3; Lk 9:9, 18; J 18:4, 7 (cp. Jos., Ant. 9, 56). τίς σοφὸς … ἐν ὑμῖν; Js 3:13. τίς οὖν ἐστιν; who, then, is she? Hs 2, 4, 1.—Esp. in questions to which the answer ‘nobody’ is expected Ac 8:33 (Is 53:8); Ro 7:24; 8:24, 33–35; 9:19b; 10:16 (Is 53:1); 11:34ab (Is 40:13ab); 1 Cor 9:7abc; 2 Cor 11:29ab. Likew. τίς … εἰ μή; who … except (for), but? Mk 2:7; Lk 5:21b; 1J 2:22; 5:5 (PsSol. 5:3, 11). Pl. ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ; Ac 19:15. Cp. 2 Ti 3:14; Hb 3:16–18; Rv 7:13.—Foll. by partitive gen. (JosAs 6:7 [τίς … ἀνθρώπων;]; Ar. 9, 5; Tat. 2, 1) τίς τούτων τῶν τριῶν; Lk 10:36. τίνος ὑμῶν υἱός; 14:5. τίνι τῶν ἀγγέλων; Hb 1:5. τίνα τῶν προφητῶν; Ac 7:52. Cp. Mt 22:28; Mk 12:23; Hb 1:13 al. For the part. gen. τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν; etc. Mt 6:27; Lk 11:5; 14:28.—Mt 21:31. τίνα ἀπὸ τῶν δύο; Mt 27:21.
    ב. who? in the sense what sort of person? (=ποῖος; cp. Ex 3:11; Jdth 12:14; Jos., Ant. 6, 298; Ath. 12, 2) τίς ἐστιν οὗτος ὸ̔ς λαλεῖ βλασφημίας; Lk 5:21a. Cp. 19:3; J 8:53; Ac 11:17 (cp. 4 Km 8:13); Ro 14:4; 1 Cor 3:5ab v.l. (in both); Js 4:12. σὺ τίς εἶ; (just) who are you? what sort of person are you? (Menand., Epitr. 391 S. [215 Kö.]; Epict. 3, 1, 22; 23; Herm. Wr. 1, 2; Job 35:2; Tat. 6, 2 τίς ἤμην, οὐκ ἐγίνωσκον) J 1:19; 8:25; 21:12. τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι who am I, that GJs 12:2 (Ex 3:11).
    ג. which of two? (=πότερος) Mt 27:17; Lk 22:27; J 9:2.
    ד. as a substitute for the rel. pron. (Callimachus 28 [=30], 2; Ptolemaeus Euergetes in Athen. 10, 438e τίνι ἡ τύχη δίδωσι, λαβέτω. Cp. BGU 665 III, 13 [I A.D.]; 822, 4 [III A.D.] εὗρον γεοργόν, τίς αὐτὰ ἑλκύσῃ; Gen 38:25; Lev 21:17; Dt 29:17; s. 1aβו below and s. Kühner-G. II 517f; OImmisch, Leipz. Studien z. klass. Philol. 10, 1887, 309ff; KBuresch, RhM n.s. 46, 1891, 231ff; Mlt. 21 n. 1; 93f; Rob. 737f; Dssm., LO 266, 5 [CIG 9552—LAE 313, 6]; Mayser II/1, 1926, 80) τίνα με ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ Ac 13:25 v.l. So also Js 3:13, if it is to be punctuated τίς σοφὸς ἐν ὑμῖν, δειξάτω.
    β. τί;
    א. what? τί σοι δοκεῖ; Mt 17:25a; cp. 18:12; 21:28. τί ποιήσει; vs. 40. Cp. Mk 9:33; 10:3, 17; Lk 10:26; J 1:22b; 18:38; Ac 8:36; Ro 10:8; 1 Cor 4:7b al. τίνι; to what (thing)? Lk 13:18ab; 20.—W. prepositions: διὰ τί; why? for what reason? cp. διά B 2b. εἰς τί; why? for what purpose? εἰς 4f. ἐν τίνι; with what? through whom? Mt 5:13; 12:27; Mk 9:50; Lk 11:19; 14:34; Ac 4:9. πρὸς τί; why? (X., Cyr. 6, 3, 20; 8, 4, 21) J 13:28. χάριν τίνος; why? lit. ‘because of what thing?’ 1J 3:12 (cp. Just., A II, 12, 5; Tat. 34, 3).
    ב. what sort of thing? (=ποῖον) τί ἐστιν τοῦτο; what sort of thing is this? (Ps.-Lucian, Halc. 1 τίς ἡ φωνή; Ex 16:15) Mk 1:27. τί τὸ πλοῦτος what sort of wealth Col 1:27; cp. Eph 1:19; 3:18.
    ג. which of two? (=πότερον; Pla., Phlb. 52d) Mt 9:5; 23:19; Mk 2:9; Lk 5:23; 1 Cor 4:21; Phil 1:22.
    ד. τί as pred. can go w. a subject that is in the pl. (Pla., Tht. 155c τί ἐστι ταῦτα; [so also TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 16=Stone p. 30, and TestLevi 2:9 v.l.]; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 11, 1; Synes., Prov. 2, 2 p. 118b; Laud. Therap. 18 τί μοι ταῦτα; cp. TestAbr A 7 p. 83, 32 [Stone p. 14] τί τὰ ὁραθέντα; GrBar 2:7 τί εἰσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι οὗτοι; what’s the meaning of these people? Jos., Vi. 296 τί γεγόνασιν;) or that is not neut. gender (B-D-F §299, 1; 2; Rob. 736; cp. X., Hell. 2, 3, 17 τί ἔσοιτο ἡ πολιτεία, Mem. 4, 2, 21; GrBar 6:13 τί ἐστιν ἡ φωνὴ αὕτη; ApcMos 5 τί ἐστιν πόνος καὶ νόσος;): τί ἐστι ἄνθρωπος; (Epict. 2, 5, 26; 2, 9, 2) Hb 2:6 (Ps 8:5). ταῦτα τί ἐστιν εἰς τοσούτους; J 6:9. ἐπυνθάνετο τί ἂν εἴη ταῦτα Lk 15:26. τί ἐσόμεθα 1J 3:2. τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο what had become of Peter Ac 12:18. οὗτος δὲ τί (ἔσται); what about this man? J 21:21. This pass. forms a transition to
    ה. elliptical expressions: τί οὐν; (X., Mem. 4, 2, 17; Teles p. 25, 13; Diod S 13, 26, 1; Ael. Aristid. 28, 17 K.=49 p. 496 D.; schol. on Pind., O. 12, 20c; Jos., Bell. 2, 364; Just., D. 3, 6; Ath. 15, 1.—1 Cor 14:15, 26 the expr. is given more fully τί οὖν ἐστιν; Ro 6:1; 7:7; 9:14, 30 τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν; 1 Cor 10:19 τί οὖν φημι;) J 1:21; Ro 3:9; 6:15 (Seneca, Ep. 47, 15 also introduces an absurd inference w. ‘quid ergo’); 11:7.—τί γάρ; what, then, is the situation? (Ps.-Pla., Erx. 1, 392b; Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 2, 38; Dio Chrys. 71 [21], 16; Lucian, Tyrannic. 13; Just., D. 1, 3) Ro 3:3; what does it matter? Phil 1:18. Also τί γάρ μοι (TestJob 23:8 τί γάρ μοι ἡ θρίξ) w. inf. foll. is it any business of mine? (Tat. 33, 2 τί γάρ μοι … λέγειν why should I take the time … to say something?—cp. without γάρ Epict. 2, 17, 14 καὶ τί μοι; 3, 22, 66 τί οὖν σοι; Maximus Tyr. 2, 10c) 1 Cor 5:12.—On τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς (πρός σε); s. πρός 3eγ. On τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί; s. ἐγώ, end; also Schwyzer II 143; Goodsp., Probs. 98–101; MSmith, JBL 64, ’45, 512f; JLilly, CBQ 8, ’46, 52–57. τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί; has the same mng.: Mt 8:29; Mk 1:24a; Lk 4:34a (cp. Epict. 2, 19, 16; 2, 20, 11).—τί ὅτι;=τί γέγονεν ὅτι; (cp. J 14:22) what has happened that? why? (LXX; JosAs 16:5 τί ὅτι εἶπας … ;) Mk 2:16 v.l.; Lk 2:49; Ac 5:4, 9; Hs 9, 5, 2.—On ἵνα τί s. the entry ἱνατί.
    ו. as a substitute for the relative (SIG 543, 12; 705, 56; 736, 50; s. aαד above) οὐ τί ἐγὼ θέλω ἀλλὰ τί σύ Mk 14:36. Cp. 4:24; Lk 17:8; Ac 13:25. Pl. 1 Ti 1:7.—οὐκ ἔχουσιν τί φάγωσιν Mt 15:32; Mk 8:2 (cp. vs. 1) is prob. to be understood as an indirect question=‘they do not know what they are to eat’ (W-S. §24, 17b).
    γ. Two interrog. pronouns stand together without a conjunction (distributive; s. Kühner-G. II 521f; B-D-F §298, 5; Rob. 737) τίς τί ἄρῃ what each one should receive Mk 15:24. τίς τί διεπραγματεύσατο what each one gained in trading Lk 19:15 v.l. Cp. Hv 3, 8, 6; m 6, 1, 1 (s. also Ael. Aristid. 31 p. 598 D.: τί τίς ἂν λέγοι; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 2, 33).
    ⓑ as adj. (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 15 [Stone p. 40] τί ῥῆμα γενήσεται; TestJob 47:1 τίς οὖν χρεία; ApcEsdr 5:26 p. 30, 30 Tdf. τίς ἄρα ἄνθρωπος; Just., A I, 53, 2 al.) τίνα what (sort of) μισθὸν ἔχετε; Mt 5:46. τίς βασιλεύς; Lk 14:31. Cp. 15:4, 8; J 2:18; 18:29; Ac 10:29; 1 Cor 15:2; 2 Cor 6:14–16 (five times). 1 Th 4:2 οἰδατε γὰρ τίνα παραγγελία for you know what instructions (we gave you). In Ac 7:49 τί replaces ποῖο (as read by D, after Is 66:1); cp. 1 Pt 1:11, where τί and the following ποῖο are contrasted. τί περισσόν; etc.: Mt 5:47; 19:16; 27:23.
    ② interrogative expression of reason for, why? adv. τί (Hom., Pla., et al.; LXX; TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 23 [Stone p. 18]; B 7 p. 111, 4 [St. p. 70]; ApcEsdr 5:16 p. 30, 15 Tdf.; ApcSed 3:1; ApcMos 27; Just., A I, 20, 3; Tat. 10, 2; Ath. 17, 4) τί μεριμνᾶτε; why do you worry? Mt 6:28. Cp. 7:3; 19:17; Mk 2:7a, 8; 4:40; 11:3; Lk 2:48; 6:46; 19:33; 24:38a; J 7:19; 18:23; Ac 1:11; 14:15; 26:8; 1 Cor 4:7c; 10:30; Col 2:20. τί τοῦτο ἐποίησας; GJs 13:2; 15:3 (GrBar 1:2 τί ἐποίησας τοῦτο;). τί οὖν ὁ νόμος; why have the law, then=well then, what’s the use of the (Mosaic) law? Gal 3:19. τί καί; why, indeed? for what possible reason? 1 Cor 15:29b, 30. τί γινώσκω ποῦ ἐστιν ὁ υἱός μου; how should I know where my son is? GJs 23:1.
    ③ exclamatory expression of extent or degree, how! adv. τί (transl. of Hebr. מָה; W-S. §21, 4; B-D-F §299, 4; Rob. 739; 1176; LXX [Ps 3:2; SSol 1:10; 7:7; 2 Km 6:20]; Basilius, Hexaëm. p. 8b MPG τί καλὴ ἡ τάξις [s. JTrunk, De Basilio Magno sermonis Attici imitatore: Wissensch. Beilage z. Jahresber. d. Gymn. Ehingen a. D. 1911, 36]) τί στενή Mt 7:14; τί θέλω Lk 12:49 (s. θέλω 1, end, and Black, Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 121–24).—M-M. EDNT.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > τίς

  • 27 ἐξουσία

    ἐξουσία, ας, ἡ (Soph., Thu.+; ins, pap, LXX, En, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., Just.; Tat. 30, 1; Mel., P. 104, 810 [Bodm.]) from ἔξεστιν.
    ① a state of control over someth., freedom of choice, right (e.g., the ‘right’ to act, decide, or dispose of one’s property as one wishes: BGU 1158, 13 [9 B.C.] = Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 234, 13 legal t.t., esp. in wills: POxy 272, 13; BGU 183, 25 ἔχειν αὐτὴν τὴν ἐ. τῶν ἰδίων πάντων; PTebt 319, 21.—Sir 30:11) ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν have the right 2 Th 3:9 (Just., D 16, 4). W. inf. foll. (Teles p. 23, 14; 24, 11; Tob 2:13 S; 7:10 S) J 10:18; 1 Cor 9:4ff; Hb 13:10; Rv 13:5; B 4:2. W. obj. gen. foll. (τίς οὖν ἔτι ἔχει μου ἐξουσίαν; Epict. 3, 24, 70; διδόναι ἐξουσίαν τῶν πετεινῶν Did., Gen. 61, 24) εἰ ἄλλοι τῆς ὑμῶν ἐ. μετέχουσι 1 Cor 9:12. Also ἐ. ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον τῆς ζωῆς the right to the tree of life Rv 22:14. W. verbs of two constr. ἔχει ἐ. ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος the potter has a right over the clay, to make fr. the same lump Ro 9:21. ἐ. ἔχειν περί τινος (4 Macc 4:5) be at liberty w. regard to a thing (opp. ἀνάγκην ἔχειν) 1 Cor 7:37; cp. 8:9; ἐ. ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ a right in the gospel 9:18. ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐ. ὑπῆρχεν was at your disposal Ac 5:4 (Esth 4:17b; Appian, Liby. 52 §226 ἐν ἐ. εἶναι τί τινι=someth. is at someone’s disposal, is within one’s power).
    ② potential or resource to command, control, or govern, capability, might, power (on capacity for someth. cp. Did., Gen. 162, 5: ἡ προσαιρέσεως ἐξουσία; cp. 1 Esdr 4:28, 40; 2 Macc 7:16 the king can do what he pleases because he has the capability for doing so) ἡ ἐ. τ. ἵππων ἐν τ. στόματι αὐτῶν ἐστιν Rv 9:19; cp. vs. 3; 13:2, 4; 18:1; Mt 9:8; Ac 8:19. W. inf. foll. to indicate the thing that one is able to do (En 25:4 ἅψασθαι; Diod S 4, 52, 4 ἀμύνασθαι εἶχεν ἐξουσίαν; Mel., P. 104 πάντα κρίνει); ἐκβάλλειν τ. δαιμόνια [b]Mk 3:15. ἐμβαλεῖν εἰς τ. γέενναν Lk 12:5; cp. J 1:12; 7:1 v.l.; Rv 9:10; 11:6. W. gen. of the inf. foll. τοῦ πατεῖν ἐπάνω ὄφεων Lk 10:19; ποιεῖν ἐ. exercise power Rv 13:12. ἐ. ἔχειν τινός have power over someone (Epict. 4, 12, 8) GPt 3:7; ἑαυτοῦ IPol 7:3; also ἐ. ἔχειν ἐπί τινος Rv 20:6; cp. AcPl Ha 1, 3. Esp. of God’s power (Theodor. Prodr. 5, 313 ἡ θεῶν ἐ.; Da 4:17; Jos., Ant. 5, 109; 18, 214) Lk 12:5 (cp. 2 Cl 5:4); Ac 1:7; Jd 25; Hs 9, 23, 4. πάντων τ. ἐξουσίαν power over all Hm 4, 1, 11; Hs 9, 28, 8. πᾶσα ἡ ἐ. 5, 7, 3 (En 9:5). τὴν κατὰ πάντων ἐ. MPol. 2:1. τέλους ἐ. power over the end PtK 2 p. 13, 22. ἐ. ἐπὶ τ. πληγάς control over the plagues Rv 16:9. Also of Satan’s power Ac 26:18; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.; B 2:1.—The power that comes fr. God can involve transcendent knowledge, and both may be expressed by ἐ. (Herm. Wr. 1, 13; 14; 32). So his hearers conclude fr. Jesus’ teaching that he must have ἐ. (i.e. it is not necessary for him to first ask what the traditional practice or interpretation requires) Mk 1:22 (‘license’ of a Jewish teacher L-S-J-M Suppl., ’68; against this AArgyle, ET 80, ’68/69, 343); cp. Mt 7:29 (Rtzst., Poim. 48, 3, Mysterienrel.3 302; 363; JStarr, HTR 23, 1930, 302–5; HWindisch, Pls. u. Christus ’34, 151ff; DDaube, JTS 39, ’38, 45–59; HFlowers, ET 66, ’55, 254 [‘like a king’]; DHudson, ET 67, ’55/56, 17; JCoutts, JTS 8, ’57, 111–18 [Jesus and the 12]). The prep. expr. κατʼ ἐξουσίαν in accordance w. knowledge and power Mk 1:27 and ἐν ἐ. Lk 4:32 belong to this classification; cp. 4:36. The close relation of ἐ. w. ‘gnosis’ and teaching also B 18:1.—But it is not always possible to draw a hard and fast line betw. this sense and
    ③ the right to control or command, authority, absolute power, warrant (Sextus 36: the πιστός has ἐ. fr. God) ἐ. καὶ ἐπιτροπή (cp. Ps.-Pla., Defin. p. 415c ἐξουσία, ἐπιτροπὴ νόμου) authority and commission Ac 26:12. ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς; by whose authority are you doing this? Mt 21:23, 24, 27; Mk 11:28, 29, 33; Lk 20:2, 8. ἐ. διδόναι τινί put someone in charge (Diod S 13, 36, 2; 14, 81, 6; cp. Vi. Aesopi G 11 p. 39, 6 P.; En 9:7; TestJob 3:6; Jos., Ant. 2, 90; 20, 193) Mk 13:34; PtK 2 p. 14, 13. οἷς ἔδωκεν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τὴν ἐ. to whom he gave rights over the Gospel (for its proclamation) B 8:3. ὅτι τὸ ἄρχειν ἐξουσίας ἐστίν that ruling depends on authority 6:18. Of apostolic authority 2 Cor 10:8; 13:10; ISm 4:1. Of Jesus’ total authority Mt 28:18 (cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 32; Da 7:14; DStanley, CBQ 29, ’67, 555–73); Hs 5, 6, 1. W. gen. of the one who has authority ἐ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ Rv 12:10 (Just., A I, 40, 7). W. gen. of that over which the authority is exercised (Diod S 2, 27, 3; IDefixWünsch 4, 21; Ps 135:8, 9; Wsd 10:14; Sir 17:2; Jos., Vi. 190) ἐ. πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων over the unclean spirits Mt 10:1; Mk 6:7; cp. J 17:2; Hm 4, 3, 5; PtK 2 p. 14, 13; 1 Cl 61:2; ISm 4:1; τούτου τοῦ λαοῦ Hs 8, 3, 3. Also ἐπί w. acc. (cp. Sir 33:20) Lk 9:1; cp. Rv 6:8; 13:7. Likew. ἐπί w. gen. (cp. Da 3:97) Rv 2:26; 11:6b; 14:18. παρά τινος (also ἀπό τινος Orig., C. Cels. 2, 13, 56) indicates the source of the authority (s. παρά A3b) Ac 9:14; 26:10; Hs 5, 6, 4 (restored from the Lat.; ἐ. λαμβάνειν as Diod S 11, 42, 6; TestJob 8:2f; 16:4; Vi. Aesopi G 11 p. 39, 4 P.) and κατά τινος the one against whom it is directed (TestJob 16:2 κατʼ ἐμοῦ; 8:2 κατὰ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μου ‘over my possessions’; Sb 8316, 6f κύριε Σάραπι δὸς αὐτῷ κατεξουσίαν κατὰ τῶν ἐχθρῶν αὐτοῦ; Orig., C. Cels. 7, 43, 25) J 19:11 (HvCampenhausen, TLZ 73, ’48, 387–92); B 4:13. W. pres. inf. foll. (cp. X., Mem. 2, 6, 24 and 35; Diod S 12, 75, 4; 1 Macc 10:35; 11:58; Jos., Ant. 4, 247) Mt 9:6; Mk 2:10; Lk 5:24; J 5:27. W. aor. inf. foll. (Jdth 8:15; 1 Esdr 8:22; 1 Macc 1:13) 19:10. Foll. by gen. of the pres. inf. (4 Macc 5:15) Hm 12, 4, 2.—RDillon, ‘As One Having Authority’ (Mark 1:22): CBQ 57, ’95, 92–113.
    ④ power exercised by rulers or others in high position by virtue of their office, ruling power, official power (Ps.-Pla., Alc. 1, 135b al.; LXX; Jos., Bell. 2, 140, Vi. 80) ἐ. ὡς βασιλεύς Rv 17:12f (Diod S 2, 45, 1 βασιλικὴν ἐ. ἔχειν; 14, 32, 5 ἐ. λαμβάνειν); ἐ. τοῦ ἡγεμόνος Lk 20:20; cp. J 19:10f, s. 3 above. ἐ. ἐπάνω δέκα πόλεων Lk 19:17. ἄνθρωπος ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν τασσόμενος a man under authority 7:8 (MFrost, ET 45, ’34, 477f); cp. Mt 8:9; Hs 1:3.—The power of a particular office (Diod S 1, 70, 1; 14, 113, 6 ἡ ὑπατικὴ ἐξουσία; Plut., Mar. 406 [2, 1], Caes. 734 [58, 1]) ἐπαρχικὴ ἐ. the power of prefect Phlm subscr.
    ⓐ human authorities, officials, government (Dionys. Hal. 8, 44; 11, 32; POxy 261, 15) Lk 12:11 (here and elsewh. in NT w. ἀρχή, as also in Pla.); Ro 13:1, 2, 3 (with 13:1b cp. the express. ‘ancient saying’ [s. Hes., Theogony 96 ἐκ δὲ Διὸς βασιλῆες. On this HFränkel, Dichtung u. Philos. des frühen Griechentums ’62, 111 n. 6] in Artem. 2, 36 p. 135, 24; 2, 69 p. 161, 17 τὸ κρατοῦν δύναμιν ἔχει θεοῦ=the ruling power has its authority from God; Wsd 6:3; Jos., Bell. 2, 140 οὐ δίχα θεοῦ περιγενέσθαι τινὶ τὸ ἄρχειν … ἐξουσίαν); Tit 3:1. For the view that the ἐ. of Ro 13 are spirit powers, as b below, s. OCullmann, Christ and Time (tr. Filson) ’50, 191–210.—On the subj. in gener. s. LGaugusch, D. Staatslehre d. Ap. Pls nach Ro 13: ThGl 5, ’34, 529–50; JUitman, Onder Eig. Vaandel 15, ’40, 102–21; HvCampenhausen, ABertholet Festschr. ’50, 97–113; OCullmann, Zur neuesten Diskussion über die ἐξουσίαι in Rö 13:1: TZ 10, ’54, 321–36, D. Staat im NT ’612 (Eng. tr.: The State in the NT ’56, 93–114); against him AStrobel, ZNW 47, ’56, 67–93.—GCaird, Princip. and Powers ’56; RMorgenthaler TZ 12, ’56, 289–304; CMorrison, The Powers That Be ’60; EBarnikol, Rö 13. Der nichtpaulinische Ursprung der absoluten Obrigkeitsbejahung v. Rö 13:1–7 ’61, 65–133; HSchlier, Principalities and Powers in the NT ’61 (Eng. tr.); MBorg, NTS 19, ’72/73, 205–18. οἱ ἐπʼ ἐξουσίαν ἀχθέντες those who are brought before the authorities Hs 9, 28, 4.
    ⓑ of transcendent rulers and functionaries: powers of the spirit world (TestLevi 3:8; TestSol 20:15 B), sg. (w. ἀρχή and δύναμις) 1 Cor 15:24; Eph 1:21; Col 2:10. Pl. (w. ἀρχαί as Just., D. 41, 1; cp. Orig., C. Cels. 4, 29, 22) Eph 3:10; 6:12; Col 1:16; 2:15; (w. ἄγγελοι, δυνάμεις) 1 Pt 3:22. Cp. the v.l. for ἄρχειν Papias (4).
    ⑥ the sphere in which power is exercised, domain (4 Km 20:13; Ps 113:2) Lk 4:6. ἐκ τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου ἐστίν he comes fr. Herod’s jurisdiction 23:7. ἐ. τοῦ σκότους domain of darkness 22:53; Col 1:13 (opp. the βασιλεία of Christ). Hence ἐ. τοῦ ἀέρος simply domain of the air Eph 2:2; s. ἀήρ 2b.
    ⑦ Various opinions are held about the mng. of 1 Cor 11:10 ὀφείλει ἡ γυνὴ ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς διὰ τοὺς ἀγγέλους. Many now understand it as a means of exercising power (cp. δύναμις 1b.—It is abstract for concrete, as βασιλεία [1] in Diod S 1, 47, 5: a stone figure ἔχουσα τρεῖς βασιλείας ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς=that wears three symbols of royal power [diadems] on its head), that is to say, the veil (κάλυμμα is v.l. for ἐ. here; s. critical apparatus in N.) by which women at prayer (when they draw near to the heavenly realm) protect themselves fr. the amorous glances of certain angels. But the veil may also have been simply a symbol of womanly dignity, esp. befitting a Christian woman, and esp. in the presence of holy angels (s. Cadbury below).—WWeber, ZWT 46, 1903, 487–99; Dibelius, Geisterwelt 12–23 al.; EFehrle, Die kultische Keuschheit im Altertum1910, 39; RPerdelwitz, StKr 86, 1913, 611–13; LBrun, ZNW 14, 1913, 298–308; GKittel, Rabbinica 1920, 17ff; Billerb. III 423–35; KBornhäuser, NKZ 41, 1930, 475–88; WFoerster, ZNW 30, ’31, 185f; MGinsburger, RHPR 12, ’32, 245–47; OMotta, ET 44, ’33, 139–41; CSpicq, RB 48, ’39, 557–62; EBlakeney, ET 55, ’44, 138; SLösch, TQ 127, ’47, 216–61; JFitzmyer, NTS 3, ’57, 48–58; HCadbury, HTR 51, ’58, 1f (Qumran parallels); MHooker, NTS 10, ’64, 410–16; AIsaksson, Marriage and Ministry in the NT ’65, 176–81; GSchwartz, ZNW 70, ’79, 249 (Aramaic background).—LCerfaux et JTondriau, Un Concurrent du Christianisme, ’57. S. on ἄγγελος 2c.—V.l. for ἄρχειν Papias (4).—DELG s.v. εἰμί. New Docs 2, 83f. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐξουσία

  • 28 ὄνομα

    -ατος + τό N 3 257-280-174-197-137=1045 Gn 2,11.13.19.20; 3,20
    name Gn 2,11; class, genus Gn 2,20; name, fame Gn 21,23; name, reputation Gn 11,4; name, memory Dt 25,19; name, authority of [τινος] 1 Sm 25,9; name, family Na 1,14; name, person Nm 1,18
    ὄνομα πονηρόν a bad reputation Dt 22,14; υἱόν, ᾧ ὄνομα Εννων a son, whose name is Ennon Jb 42,17c; ἐν ἑνὶ ὀνόματι θανάτου by the one form of death or at once, in the time needed to pronounce the word death Wis 18,12
    *Is 42,4 ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ in his name corr.? ἐπὶ τῷ νόμῳ αὐτοῦ for MT לתורתו in his law, see also
    Is 26,8; *Nm 4,27 ἐξ ὀνομάτων by name -מותשׁ/מ/ב
    for MT
    ב/משׁמרת/ם
    in their charge?; *Dt 17,12
    ὀνόματι (in the) name-םשֵׁ for MT םשָׁ there, see also Is 33,21, Ez 43,7, 48,35; *Zph 1,4 ὀνόματα name-םשׁ for MT ארשׁ remnant; *Ps 39(40),5 τὸ ὄνομα the name-םשׁ for MT םשׂ (who) puts; *Ps 71 (72),14 ὄνομα αὐτῶν their name-מםשׁ for MT דמם their blood; *Prv 27,16 ὀνόματι δέ and by name-םשׁו for MT מןשׁו and oil
    Cf. HEITMÜLLER 1903, 110-111; KOENIG 1982 232-233(Is 42,4); LARCHER 1985 1010(Wis 18,12); SHIPP
    1979, 416; WEVERS 1993 149.310. 463; 1995 393(Dt 25,7); →LSJ RSuppl(Wis 18,12); NIDNTT; PREISIGKE; TWNT

    Lust (λαγνεία) > ὄνομα

  • 29 λόγος

    λόγος, ὁ, verbal noun of λέγω (B), with senses corresponding to λέγω (B) II and III (on the various senses of the word v. Theo Sm.pp.72,73 H., An.Ox.4.327): common in all periods in Prose and Verse, exc. Epic, in which it is found in signf. derived from λέγω (B) 111, cf.infr. VI. 1 a:
    I computation, reckoning (cf. λέγω (B) II).
    1 account of money handled,

    σανίδες εἰς ἃς τὸν λ. ἀναγράφομεν IG12.374.191

    ; ἐδίδοσαν τὸν λ. ib.232.2;

    λ. δώσεις τῶν μετεχείρισας χρημάτων Hdt.3.142

    , cf. 143;

    οὔτε χρήματα διαχειρίσας τῆς πόλεως δίδωμι λ. αὐτῶν οὔτε ἀρχὴν ἄρξας οὐδεμίαν εὐθύνας ὑπέχω νῦν αὐτῆς Lys.24.26

    ;

    λ. ἀπενεγκεῖν Arist.Ath.54.1

    ;

    ἐν ταῖς εὐθύναις τοῦ τοιούτου λ. ὑπεχέτω Pl.Lg. 774b

    ;

    τὸν τῶν χρημάτων λ. παρὰ τούτων λαμβάνειν D.8.47

    ;

    ἀδικήματα εἰς ἀργυρίου λ. ἀνήκοντα Din.1.60

    ; συνᾶραι λόγον μετά τινος settle accounts with, Ev.Matt.18.23, etc.; δεύτεροι λ. a second audit, Cod.Just.1.4.26.1; ὁ τραπεζιτικὸς λ. banking account, Theo Sm.p.73 H.: metaph.,

    οὐκ ἂν πριαίμην οὐδενὸς λ. βροτόν S.Aj. 477

    .
    b public accounts, i. e. branch of treasury, ἴδιος λ., in Egypt, OGI188.2, 189.3, 669.38; also as title of treasurer, ib.408.4, Str.17.1.12;

    ὁ ἐπὶ τῶν λ. IPE2.29

     A ([place name] Panticapaeum); δημόσιος λ., = Lat. fiscus, OGI669.21 (Egypt, i A.D.), etc. (but later, = aerarium, Cod.Just.1.5.15); also

    Καίσαρος λ. OGI669.30

    ; κυριακὸς λ. ib.18.
    2 generally, account, reckoning, μὴ φῦναι τὸν ἅπαντα νικᾷ λ. excels the whole account, i.e. is best of all, S.OC 1225 (lyr.); δόντας λ. τῶν ἐποίησαν accounting for, i.e. paying the penalty for their doings, Hdt.8.100;

    λ. αἰτεῖν Pl.Plt. 285e

    ;

    λ. δοῦναι καὶ δέξασθαι Id.Prt. 336c

    , al.;

    λαμβάνειν λ. καὶ ἐλέγχειν Id.Men. 75d

    ;

    παρασχεῖν τῶν εἰρημένων λ. Id.R. 344d

    ;

    λ. ἀπαιτεῖν D.30.15

    , cf. Arist. EN 1104a3; λ. ὑπέχειν, δοῦναι, D.19.95;

    λ. ἐγγράψαι Id.24.199

    , al.;

    λ. ἀποφέρειν τῇ πόλει Aeschin.3.22

    , cf. Eu. Luc.16.2, Ep.Hebr.13.17;

    τὸ παράδοξον τῶν συμβεβηκότων ὑπὸ λόγον ἄγειν Plb.15.34.2

    ; λ. ἡ ἐπιστήμη, πολλὰ δὲ ὁ λ. the account is manifold, Plot.6.9.4; ἔχων λόγον τοῦ διὰ τί an account of the cause, Arist.APo. 74b27; ἐς λ. τινός on account of,

    ἐς χρημάτων λ. Th.3.46

    , cf. Plb.5.89.6, LXX 2 Ma1.14, JRS 18.152 ([place name] Jerash); λόγῳ c. gen., by way of, Cod.Just.3.2.5. al.; κατὰ λόγον τοῦ μεγέθους if we take into account his size, Arist.HA 517b27;

    πρὸς ὃν ἡμῖν ὁ λ. Ep.Hebr.4.13

    , cf. D.Chr.31.123.
    3 measure, tale (cf. infr. 11.1),

    θάλασσα.. μετρέεται ἐς τὸν αὐτὸν λ. ὁκοῖος πρόσθεν Heraclit.31

    ;

    ψυχῆς ἐστι λ. ἑαυτὸν αὔξων Id.115

    ; ἐς τούτου (sc. γήραος) λ. οὐ πολλοί τινες ἀπικνέονται to the point of old age, Hdt.3.99, cf.7.9.β; ὁ ξύμπας λ. the full tale, Th.7.56, cf. Ep.Phil.4.15; κοινῷ λ. νομίσαντα common measure, Pl.Lg. 746e; sum, total of expenditure, IG42(1).103.151 (Epid., iv B.C.); ὁ τῆς οὐσίας λ., = Lat. patrimonii modus, Cod.Just.1.5.12.20.
    4 esteem, consideration, value put on a person or thing (cf. infr. VI. 2 d), οὗ πλείων λ. ἢ τῶν ἄλλων who is of more worth than all the rest, Heraclit.39; βροτῶν λ. οὐκ ἔσχεν οὐδέν' A.Pr. 233;

    οὐ σμικροῦ λ. S.OC 1163

    : freq. in Hdt.,

    Μαρδονίου λ. οὐδεὶς γίνεται 8.102

    ;

    τῶν ἦν ἐλάχιστος ἀπολλυμένων λ. 4.135

    , cf. E.Fr.94;

    περὶ ἐμοῦ οὐδεὶς λ. Ar.Ra.87

    ; λόγου οὐδενὸς γίνεσθαι πρός τινος to be of no account, repute with.., Hdt.1.120, cf.4.138; λόγου ποιήσασθαί τινα make one of account, Id.1.33; ἐλαχίστου, πλείστου λ. εἶναι, to be highly, lowly esteemed, Id.1.143, 3.146; but also λόγον τινὸς ποιεῖσθαι, like Lat. rationem habere alicujus, make account of, set a value on, Democr.187, etc.: usu. in neg. statements,

    οὐδένα λ. ποιήσασθαί τινος Hdt.1.4

    , cf. 13, Plb.21.14.9, etc.;

    λ. ἔχειν Hdt.1.62

    , 115;

    λ. ἴσχειν περί τινος Pl.Ti. 87c

    ;

    λ. ἔχειν περὶ τοὺς ποιητάς Lycurg.107

    ;

    λ. ἔχειν τινός D.18.199

    , Arist.EN 1102b32, Plu.Phil.18 (but also, have the reputation of.., v. infr. VI. 2 e);

    ἐν οὐδενὶ λ. ποιήσασθαί τι Hdt.3.50

    ; ἐν οὐδενὶ λ. ἀπώλοντο without regard, Id.9.70;

    ἐν σμικρῷ λ. εἶναι Pl.R. 550a

    ; ὑμεῖς οὔτ' ἐν λ. οὔτ' ἐν ἀριθμῷ Orac. ap. Sch.Theoc.14.48; ἐν ἀνδρῶν λ. [εἶναι] to be reckoned, count as a man, Hdt.3.120; ἐν ἰδιώτεω λόγῳ καὶ ἀτίμου reckoned as.., Eus.Mynd.Fr. 59;

    σεμνὸς εἰς ἀρετῆς λ. καὶ δόξης D.19.142

    .
    II relation, correspondence, proportion,
    1 generally, ὑπερτερίης λ. relation (of gold to lead), Thgn.418 = 1164;

    πρὸς λόγον τοῦ σήματος A.Th. 519

    ; κατὰ λόγον προβαίνοντες τιμῶσι in inverse ratio, Hdt.1.134, cf. 7.36;

    κατὰ λ. τῆς ἀποφορῆς Id.2.109

    ; τἄλλα κατὰ λ. in like fashion, Hp.VM16, Prog.17: c. gen., κατὰ λ. τῶν πρόσθεν ib. 24;

    κατὰ λ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ar. Nu. 619

    ;

    κατὰ λ. τῆς δυνάμεως X. Cyr.8.6.11

    ;

    ἐλάττω ἢ κατὰ λ. Arist. HA 508a2

    , cf. PA 671a18;

    ἐκ ταύτης ἐγένετο ἐκείνη κατὰ λ. Id.Pol. 1257a31

    ; cf. εὔλογος: sts. with ὁ αὐτός added, κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν λ. τῷ τείχεϊ in fashion like to.., Hdt.1.186; περὶ τῶν νόσων ὁ αὐτὸς λ. analogously, Pl.Tht. 158d, cf. Prm. 136b, al.; εἰς τὸν αὐτὸν λ. similarly, Id.R. 353d; κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν λ. in the same ratio, IG12.76.8; by parity of reasoning, Pl.Cra. 393c, R. 610a, al.; ἀνὰ λόγον τινός, τινί, Id.Ti. 29c, Alc.2.145d; τοῦτον ἔχει τὸν λ. πρὸς.. ὃν ἡ παιδεία πρὸς τὴν ἀρετήν is related to.. as.., Procl.in Euc.p.20 F., al.
    2 Math., ratio, proportion (ὁ κατ' ἀνάλογον λ., λ. τῆς ἀναλογίας, Theo Sm.p.73 H.), Pythag. 2;

    ἰσότης λόγων Arist.EN 113a31

    ;

    λ. ἐστὶ δύο μεγεθῶν ἡ κατὰ πηλικότητα ποιὰ σχέσις Euc.5

     Def.3;

    τῶν ἁρμονιῶν τοὺς λ. Arist.Metaph. 985b32

    , cf. 1092b14; λόγοι ἀριθμῶν numerical ratios, Aristox.Harm.p.32 M.; τοὺς φθόγγους ἀναγκαῖον ἐν ἀριθμοῦ λ. λέγεσθαι πρὸς ἀλλήλους to be expressed in numerical ratios, Euc.Sect.Can. Proëm.: in Metre, ratio between arsis and thesis, by which the rhythm is defined, Aristox.Harm.p.34 M.;

    ἐὰν ᾖ ἰσχυροτέρα τοῦ αἰσθητηρίου ἡ κίνησις, λύεται ὁ λ. Arist.de An. 424a31

    ; ἀνὰ λόγον analogically, Archyt.2; ἀνὰ λ. μερισθεῖσα [ἡ ψυχή] proportionally, Pl. Ti. 37a; so

    κατὰ λ. Men.319.6

    ; πρὸς λόγον in proportion, Plb.6.30.3, 9.15.3 (but πρὸς λόγον ἐπὶ στενὸν συνάγεται narrows uniformly, Sor. 1.9, cf. Diocl.Fr.171);

    ἐπὶ λόγον IG5(1).1428

     ([place name] Messene).
    3 Gramm., analogy, rule, τῷ λ. τῶν μετοχικῶν, τῆς συγκοπῆς, by the rule of the participles, of syncope, Choerob. in Theod.1.75 Gaisf., 1.377 H.;

    εἰπέ μοι τὸν λ. τοῦ Αἴας Αἴαντος, τουτέστι τὸν κανόνα An.Ox. 4.328

    .
    1 plea, pretext, ground, ἐκ τίνος λ.; A.Ch. 515;

    ἐξ οὐδενὸς λ. S.Ph. 731

    ;

    ἀπὸ παντὸς λ. Id.OC 762

    ;

    χὠ λ. καλὸς προσῆν Id.Ph. 352

    ;

    σὺν ἀφανεῖ λ. Id.OT 657

     (lyr., v.l. λόγων)

    ; ἐν ἀφανεῖ λ. Antipho 5.59

    ;

    ἐπὶ τοιούτῳ λ. Hdt.6.124

    ; κατὰ τίνα λ.; on what ground? Pl.R. 366b; οὐδὲ πρὸς ἕνα λ. to no purpose, Id.Prt. 343d; ἐπὶ τίνι λ.; for what reason? X.HG2.2.19; τὸν λ. τοῦτον this ground of complaint, Aeschin.3.228; τίνι δικαίῳ λ.; what just cause is there? Pl.Grg. 512c; τίνι λ.; on what account? Act.Ap.10.29; κατὰ λόγον ἂν ἠνεσχόμην ὑμῶν reason would that.., ib.18.14; λ. ἔχειν, with personal subject, εἶχον ἄν τινα λ. I (i.e. my conduct) would have admitted of an explanation, Pl.Ap. 31b; τὸν ὀρθὸν λ. the true explanation, ib. 34b.
    b plea, case, in Law or argument (cf. VIII. I), τὸν ἥττω λ. κρείττω ποιεῖν to make the weaker case prevail, ib. 18b, al., Arist.Rh. 1402a24, cf. Ar.Nu. 1042 (pl.); personified, ib. 886, al.;

    ἀμύνεις τῷ τῆς ἡδονῆς λ. Pl.Phlb. 38a

    ;

    ἀνοίσεις τοὺς λ. αὐτῶν πρὸς τὸν θεόν LXXEx.18.19

    ; ἐχειν λ. πρός τινα to have a case, ground of action against.., Act.Ap.19.38.
    2 statement of a theory, argument, οὐκ ἐμεῦ ἀλλὰ τοῦ λ. ἀκούσαντας prob. in Heraclit.50; λόγον ἠδὲ νόημα ἀμφὶς ἀληθείης discourse and reflection on reality, Parm.8.50; δηλοῖ οὗτος ὁ λ. ὅτι .. Democr.7; οὐκ ἔχει λόγον it is not arguable, i.e. reasonable, S.El. 466, Pl.Phd. 62d, etc.;

    ἔχει λ. D.44.32

    ;

    οὐδεὶς αὐτὰ καταβαλεῖ λ. E.Ba. 202

    ;

    δίκασον.. τὸν λ. ἀκούσας Pl.Lg. 696b

    ; personified, φησὶ οὗτος ὁ λ. ib. 714d, cf. Sph. 238b, Phlb. 50a; ὡς ὁ λ. (sc. λέγει) Arist.EN 1115b12; ὡς ὁ λ. ὁ ὀρθὸς λέγει ib. 1138b20, cf. 29;

    ὁ λ. θέλει προσβιβάζειν Phld.Rh.1.41

    , cf.1.19 S.;

    οὐ γὰρ ἂν ἀκούσειε λόγου ἀποτρέποντος Arist.EN 1179b27

    ;

    λ. καθαίρων Aristo Stoic.1.88

    ; λόγου τυγχάνειν to be explained, Phld.Mus.p.77 K.; ὁ τὸν λ. μου ἀκούων my teaching, Ev.Jo.5.24; ὁ προφητικὸς λ., collect., of VT prophecy, 2 Ep.Pet.1.19: pl.,

    ὁκόσων λόγους ἤκουσα Heraclit.108

    ;

    οὐκ ἐπίθετο τοῖς ἐμοῖς λ. Ar.Nu.73

    ; of arguments leading to a conclusion ([etym.] ὁ λ.), Pl. Cri. 46b;

    τὰ Ἀναξαγόρου βιβλία γέμει τούτων τῶν λ. Id.Ap. 26d

    ; λ. ἀπὸ τῶν ἀρχῶν, ἐπὶ τὰς ἀρχάς, Arist.EN 1095a31; συλλογισμός ἐστι λ. ἐν ᾧ τεθέντων τινῶν κτλ. Id.APr. 24b18; λ. ἀντίτυπός τε καὶ ἄπορος, of a self-contradictory theory, Plot.6.8.7.
    b ὁ περὶ θεῶν λ., title of a discourse by Protagoras, D.L.9.54; ὁ Ἀχιλλεὺς λ., name of an argument, ib.23;

    ὁ αὐξόμενος λ. Plu.2.559b

    ; καταβάλλοντες (sc. λόγοι), title of work by Protagoras, S.E.M.7.60;

    λ. σοφιστικοί Arist.SE 165a34

    , al.;

    οἱ μαθηματικοὶ λ. Id.Rh. 1417a19

    , etc.; οἱ ἐξωτερικοὶ λ., current outside the Lyceum, Id.Ph. 217b31, al.; Δισσοὶ λ., title of a philosophical treatise (= Dialex.); Λ. καὶ Λογίνα, name of play of Epicharmus, quibble, argument, personified, Ath.8.338d.
    c in Logic, proposition, whether as premiss or conclusion,

    πρότασίς ἐστι λ. καταφατικὸς ἢ ἀποφατικός τινος κατά τινος Arist.APr. 24a16

    .
    d rule, principle, law, as embodying the result of λογισμός, Pi.O.2.22, P.1.35, N.4.31;

    πείθεσθαι τῷ λ. ὃς ἄν μοι λογιζομένῳ βέλτιστος φαίνηται Pl.Cri. 46b

    , cf. c; ἡδονὰς τοῖς ὀρθοῖς λ. ἑπομένας obeying right principles, Id.Lg. 696c; προαιρέσεως [ἀρχὴ] ὄρεξις καὶ λ. ὁ ἕνεκά τινος principle directed to an end, Arist.EN 1139a32; of the final cause,

    ἀρχὴ ὁ λ. ἔν τε τοῖς κατὰ τέχνην καὶ ἐν τοῖς φύσει συνεστηκόσιν Id.PA 639b15

    ; ἀποδιδόασι τοὺς λ. καὶ τὰς αἰτίας οὗ ποιοῦσι ἑκάστου ib.18; [

    τέχνη] ἕξις μετὰ λ. ἀληθοῦς ποιητική Id.EN 1140a10

    ; ὀρθὸς λ. true principle, right rule, ib. 1144b27, 1147b3, al.; κατὰ λόγον by rule, consistently,

    ὁ κατὰ λ. ζῶν Pl.Lg. 689d

    , cf. Ti. 89d; τὸ κατὰ λ. ζῆν, opp. κατὰ πάθος, Arist.EN 1169a5; κατὰ λ. προχωρεῖν according to plan, Plb.1.20.3.
    3 law, rule of conduct,

    ᾧ μάλιστα διηνεκῶς ὁμιλοῦσι λόγῳ Heraclit.72

    ;

    πολλοὶ λόγον μὴ μαθόντες ζῶσι κατὰ λόγον Democr.53

    ; δεῖ ὑπάρχειν τὸν λ. τὸν καθόλου τοῖς ἄρχουσιν universal principle, Arist.Pol. 1286a17;

    ὁ νόμος.. λ. ὢν ἀπό τινος φρονήσεως καὶ νοῦ Id.EN 1180a21

    ; ὁ νόμος.. ἔμψυχος ὢν ἑαυτῷ λ. conscience, Plu. 2.780c; τὸν λ. πρόχειρον ἔχειν precept, Phld.Piet.30, cf. 102;

    ὁ προστακτικὸς τῶν ποιητέων ἢ μὴ λ. κοινός M.Ant.4.4

    .
    4 thesis, hypothesis, provisional ground, ὡς ἂν εἰ λέγοι λόγον maintain a thesis, Pl. Prt. 344b; ὑποθέμενος ἑκάστοτε λ. provisionally assuming a proposition, Id.Phd. 100a; τὸν τῆς ὁμοιότητος λ. hypothesis of equivalence, Arist.Cael. 296a20.
    5 reason, ground,

    πάντων γινομένων κατὰ τὸν λ. τόνδε Heraclit.1

    ;

    οὕτω βαθὺν λ. ἔχει Id.45

    ; ἐκ λόγου, opp. μάτην, Leucipp. 2;

    μέγιστον σημεῖον οὗτος ὁ λ. Meliss.8

    ; [ἐμπειρία] οὐκ ἔχει λ. οὐδένα ὧν προσφέρει has no grounds for.., Pl.Grg. 465a; μετὰ λόγου

    τε καὶ ἐπιστήμης θείας Id.Sph. 265c

    ; ἡ μετα λόγου ἀληθὴς δόξα ([etym.] ἐπιστήμη) Id.Tht. 201c; λόγον ζητοῦσιν ὧν οὐκ ἔστι λ. proof, Arist. Metaph. 1011a12;

    οἱ ἁπάντων ζητοῦντες λ. ἀναιροῦσι λ. Thphr.Metaph. 26

    .
    6 formula (wider than definition, but freq. equivalent thereto), term expressing reason,

    λ. τῆς πολιτείας Pl.R. 497c

    ; ψυχῆς οὐσία τε καὶ λ. essential definition, Id.Phdr. 245e;

    ὁ τοῦ δικαίου λ. Id.R. 343a

    ; τὸν λ. τῆς οὐσίας ib. 534b, cf. Phd. 78d;

    τὰς πολλὰς ἐπιστήμας ἑνὶ λ. προσειπεῖν Id.Tht. 148d

    ;

    ὁ τῆς οἰκοδομήσεως λ. ἔχει τὸν τῆς οἰκίας Arist. PA 646b3

    ;

    τεθείη ἂν ἴδιον ὄνομα καθ' ἕκαστον τῶν λ. Id.Metaph. 1006b5

    , cf. 1035b4;

    πᾶς ὁρισμὸς λ. τίς ἐστι Id.Top. 102a5

    ; ἐπὶ τῶν σχημάτων λ. κοινός generic definition, Id.de An. 414b23; ἀκριβέστατος λ. specific definition, Id.Pol. 1276b24;

    πηγῆς λ. ἔχον Ph.2.477

    ; τὸ ᾠὸν οὔτε ἀρχῆς ἔχει λ. fulfils the function of.., Plu.2.637d; λ. τῆς μίξεως formula, i. e. ratio (cf. supr. II) of combination, Arist.PA 642a22, cf. Metaph. 993a17.
    7 reason, law exhibited in the world-process, κατὰ λόγον by law,

    κόσμῳ πάντα καὶ κατὰ λ. ἔχοντα Pl.R. 500c

    ; κατ τὸν < αὐτὸν αὖ> λ. by the same law, Epich.170.18;

    ψυχῆς τὸ πᾶν τόδε διοικούσης κατὰ λ. Plot.2.3.13

    ; esp. in Stoic Philos., the divine order,

    τὸν τοῦ παντὸς λ. ὃν ἔνιοι εἱμαρμένην καλοῦσιν Zeno Stoic.1.24

    ; τὸ ποιοῦν τὸν ἐν [τῇ ὕλῃ] λ. τὸν θεόν ibid., cf. 42;

    ὁ τοῦ κόσμου λ. Chrysipp.Stoic.2.264

    ; λόγος, = φύσει νόμος, Stoic.2.169;

    κατὰ τὸν κοινὸν θεοῖς καὶ ἀνθρώποις λ. M.Ant.7.53

    ;

    ὁ ὀρθὸς λ. διὰ πάντων ἐρχόμενος Chrysipp.Stoic.3.4

    : so in Plot.,

    τὴν φύσιν εἶναι λόγον, ὃς ποιεῖ λ. ἄλλον γέννημα αὑτοῦ 3.8.2

    .
    b σπερματικὸς λ. generative principle in organisms,

    ὁ θεὸς σπ. λ. τοῦ κόσμου Zeno Stoic.1.28

    : usu. in pl., Stoic. 2.205,314,al.;

    γίνεται τὰ ἐν τῷ παντὶ οὐ κατὰ σπερματικούς, ἀλλὰ κατὰ λ. περιληπτικούς Plot.3.1.7

    , cf.4.4.39: so without

    σπερματικός, ὥσπερ τινὲς λ. τῶν μερῶν Cleanth.Stoic.1.111

    ;

    οἱ λ. τῶν ὅλων Ph.1.9

    .
    c in Neo-Platonic Philos., of regulative and formative forces, derived from the intelligible and operative in the sensible universe,

    ὄντων μειζόνων λ. καὶ θεωρούντων αὑτοὺς ἐγὼ γεγέννημαι Plot.3.8.4

    ;

    οἱ ἐν σπέρματι λ. πλάττουσι.. τὰ ζῷα οἷον μικρούς τινας κόσμους Id.4.3.10

    , cf.3.2.16,3.5.7; opp. ὅρος, Id.6.7.4;

    ἀφανεῖς λ. τῆς φύσεως Procl.

    in R.1.18 K.; τεχνικοὶ λ. ib.142 K., al.
    IV inward debate of the soul (cf.

    λ. ὃν αὐτὴ πρὸς αὑτὴν ἡ ψυχὴ διεξέρχεται Pl.Tht. 189e

     ( διάλογος in Sph. 263e); ὁ ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ, ὁ ἔσω λ. (opp. ὁ ἔξω λ.), Arist.APo. 76b25, 27; ὁ ἐνδιάθετος, opp. ὁ προφορικὸς λ., Stoic.2.43, Ph.2.154),
    1 thinking, reasoning, τοῦ λ. ἐόντος ξυνοῦ, opp. ἰδία φρόνησις, Heraclit. 2; κρῖναι δὲ λόγῳ.. ἔλεγχον test by reflection, Parm.1.36; reflection, deliberation (cf. VI.3),

    ἐδίδου λόγον ἑωυτῷ περὶ τῆς ὄψιος Hdt.1.209

    , cf. 34, S.OT 583, D.45.7; μὴ εἰδέναι.. μήτε λόγῳ μήτε ἔργῳ neither by reasoning nor by experience, Anaxag.7;

    ἃ δὴ λόγῳ μὲν καὶ διανοίᾳ ληπτά, ὄψει δ' οὔ Pl.R. 529d

    , cf. Prm. 135e;

    ὁ λ. ἢ ἡ αἴσθησις Arist.EN 1149a35

    ,al.; αὐτῷ μόνον τῷ λ. πιστεύειν (opp. αἰσθήσεις), of Parmenides and his school, Aristocl. ap. Eus.PE14.17: hence λόγῳ or τῷ λ. in idea, in thought,

    τῷ λ. τέμνειν Pl.R. 525e

    ; τῷ λ. δύο ἐστίν, ἀχώριστα πεφυκότα two in idea, though indistinguishable in fact, Arist. EN 1102a30, cf. GC 320b14, al.; λόγῳ θεωρητά mentally conceived, opp. sensibly perceived, Placit.1.3.5, cf. Demetr.Lac.Herc.1055.20;

    τοὺς λ. θεωρητοὺς χρόνους Epicur.Ep.1p.19U.

    ; διὰ λόγου θ. χ. ib.p.10 U.;

    λόγῳ καταληπτός Phld.Po.5.20

    , etc.; ὁ λ. οὕτω αἱρέει analogy proves, Hdt.2.33; ὁ λ. or λ. αἱρέει reasoning convinces, Id.3.45,6.124, cf. Pl.Cri. 48c (but, our argument shows, Lg. 663d): also c. acc. pers., χρᾶται ὅ τι μιν λ. αἱρέει as the whim took him, Hdt.1.132; ἢν μὴ ἡμέας λ. αἱρῇ unless we see fit, Id.4.127, cf. Pl.R. 607b; later ὁ αἱρῶν λ. ordaining reason, Zeno Stoic.1.50, M.Ant.2.5, cf. 4.24, Arr.Epict. 2.2.20, etc.: coupled or contrasted with other functions, καθ' ὕπνον ἐπειδὴ λόγου καὶ φρονήσεως οὐ μετεῖχε since reason and understanding are in abeyance, Pl.Ti. 71d; μετὰ λόγου τε καὶ ἐπιστήμης, opp. αἰτία αὐτομάτη, of Nature's processes of production, Id.Sph. 265c; τὸ μὲν δὴ νοήσει μετὰ λόγου περιληπτόν embraced by thought with reflection, opp. μετ' αἰσθήσεως ἀλόγου, Id.Ti. 28a; τὸ μὲν ἀεὶ μετ' ἀληθοῦς λ., opp. τὸ δὲ ἄλογον, ib. 51e, cf. 70d, al.;

    λ. ἔχων ἑπόμενον τῷ νοεῖν Id.Phlb. 62a

    ; ἐπιστήμη ἐνοῦσα καὶ ὀρθὸς λ. scientific knowledge and right process of thought, Id.Phd. 73a;

    πᾶς λ. καὶ πᾶσα ἐπιστήμη τῶν καθόλου Arist.Metaph. 1059b26

    ;

    τὸ λόγον ἔχον Id.EN 1102b15

    , 1138b9, al.: in sg. and pl., contrasted by Pl. and Arist. as theory, abstract reasoning with outward experience, sts. with depreciatory emphasis on the former,

    εἰς τοὺς λ. καταφυγόντα Pl.Phd. 99e

    ; τὸν ἐν λόγοις σκοπούμενον τὰ ὄντα, opp. τὸν ἐν ἔργοις (realities), ib. 100a;

    τῇ αἰσθήσει μᾶλλον τῶν λ. πιστευτέον Arist.GA 760b31

    ; γνωριμώτερα κατὰ τὸν λ., opp. κατὰ τὴν αἴσθησιν, Id.Ph. 189a4; ἐκ τῶν λ. δῆλον, opp. ἐκ τῆς ἐπαγωγῆς, Id.Mete. 378b20; ἡ τῶν λ. πίστις, opp. ἐκ τῶν ἔργων φανερόν, Id.Pol. 1326a29;

    ἡ πίστις οὐ μόνον ἐπὶ τῆς αἰσθήσεως ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ λ. Id.Ph. 262a19

    ;

    μαρτυρεῖ τὰ γιγνόμενα τοῖς λ. Id.Pol. 1334a6

    ; ὁ μὲν λ. τοῦ καθόλου, ἡ δὲ αἴσθησις τοῦ κατὰ μέρος explanation, opp. perception, Id.Ph. 189a7; ἔσονται τοῖς λ. αἱ πράξεις ἀκόλουθοι theory, opp. practice, Epicur.Sent.25; in Logic, of discursive reasoning, opp. intuition, Arist.EN 1142a26, 1143b1; reasoning in general, ib. 1149a26; πᾶς λ. καὶ πᾶσα ἀπόδειξις all reasoning and demonstration, Id.Metaph. 1063b10;

    λ. καὶ φρόνησιν Phld.Mus.p.105

     K.; ὁ λ. ἢ λογισμός ibid.; τὸ ἰδεῖν οὐκέτι λ., ἀλλὰ μεῖζον λόγου καὶ πρὸ λόγου, of mystical vision, opp. reasoning, Plot.6.9.10.—Phrases, κατὰ λ. τὸν εἰκότα by probable reasoning, Pl.Ti. 30b;

    οὔκουν τόν γ' εἰκότα λ. ἂν ἔχοι Id.Lg. 647d

    ; παρὰ λόγον, opp. κατὰ λ., Arist.Rh.Al. 1429a29, cf. EN 1167b19; cf. παράλογος (but παρὰ λ. unexpectedly, E.Ba. 940).
    2 reason as a faculty, ὁ λ. ἀνθρώπους κυβερνᾷ [Epich.] 256; [

    θυμοειδὲς] τοῦ λ. κατήκοον Pl.Ti. 70a

    ; [

    θυμὸς] ὑπὸ τοῦ λ. ἀνακληθείς Id.R. 440d

    ; σύμμαχον τῷ λ. τὸν θυμόν ib. b;

    πειθαρχεῖ τῷ λ. τὸ τοῦ ἐγκρατοῦς Arist. EN 1102b26

    ; ἄλλο τι παρὰ τὸν λ. πεφυκός, ὃ μάχεται τῷ λ. ib.17;

    ἐναντίωσις λόγου πρὸς ἐπιθυμίας Plot.4.7.13(8)

    ;

    οὐ θυμός, οὐκ ἐπιθυμία, οὐδὲ λ. οὐδέ τις νόησις Id.6.9.11

    : freq. in Stoic. Philos. of human Reason, opp. φαντασία, Zeno Stoic.1.39; opp. φύσις, Stoic.2.206; οὐ σοφία οὐδὲ λ. ἐστὶν ἐν [τοῖς ζῴοις] ibid.;

    τοῖς ἀλόγοις ζῴοις ὡς λ. ἔχων λ. μὴ ἔχουσι χρῶ M.Ant.6.23

    ;

    ὁ λ. κοινὸν πρὸς τοὺς θεούς Arr.Epict. 1.3.3

    ;

    οἷον [εἰκὼν] λ. ὁ ἐν προφορᾷ λόγου τοῦ ἐν ψυχῇ, οὕτω καὶ αὐτὴ λ. νοῦ Plot.5.1.3

    ; τὸ τὸν λ. σχεῖν τὴν οἰκείαν ἀρετήν (sc. εὐδαιμονίαν) Procl.in Ti.3.334 D.; also of the reason which pervades the universe, θεῖος λ. [Epich.] 257;

    τὸν θεῖον λ. καθ' Ἡράκλειτον δι' ἀναπνοῆς σπάσαντες νοεροὶ γινόμεθα S.E.M.7.129

     (cf. infr. x).
    b creative reason,

    ἀδύνατον ἦν λόγον μὴ οὐκ ἐπὶ πάντα ἐλθεῖν Plot.3.2.14

    ;

    ἀρχὴ οὖν λ. καὶ πάντα λ. καὶ τὰ γινόμενα κατ' αὐτόν Id.3.2.15

    ;

    οἱ λ. πάντες ψυχαί Id.3.2.18

    .
    V continuous statement, narrative (whether fact or fiction), oration, etc. (cf. λέγω (B) 11.2),
    1 fable, Hdt.1.141;

    Αἰσώπου λόγοι Pl.Phd. 60d

    , cf. Arist.Rh. 1393b8;

    ὁ τοῦ κυνὸς λ. X.Mem. 2.7.13

    .
    2 legend,

    ἱρὸς λ. Hdt.2.62

    , cf. 47, Pi.P.3.80 (pl.);

    συνθέντες λ. E.Ba. 297

    ;

    λ. θεῖος Pl.Phd. 85d

    ; ἱεροὶ λ., of Orphic rhapsodies, Suid. S.V. Ὀρφεύς.
    3 tale, story,

    ἄλλον ἔπειμι λ. Xenoph. 7.1

    , cf. Th.1.97, etc.;

    συνθέτους λ. A.Pr. 686

    ; σπουδὴν λόγου urgent tidings, E.Ba. 663; ἄλλος λ. 'another story', Pl.Ap. 34e; ὁμολογούμενος ὁ λ. ἐστίν the story is consistent, Isoc.3.27: pl., histories,

    ἐν τοῖσι Ἀσσυρίοισι λ. Hdt.1.184

    , cf. 106, 2.99; so in sg., a historical work, Id.2.123, 6.19,7.152: also in sg., one section of such a work (like later βίβλος), Id.2.38,6.39, cf. VI.3d; so in pl.,

    ἐν τοῖσι Λιβυκοῖσι λ. Id.2.161

    , cf. 1.75,5.22,7.93, 213;

    ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ τῶν λ. Id.5.36

    ; ὁ πρῶτος λ., of St. Luke's gospel, Act.Ap.1.1: in Pl., opp. μῦθος, as history to legend, Ti. 26e;

    ποιεῖν μύθους ἀλλ' οὐ λόγους Phd. 61b

    , cf. Grg. 523a (but μῦθον λέγειν, opp. λόγῳ ( argument)

    διεξελθεῖν Prt. 320c

    , cf. 324d);

    περὶ λόγων καὶ μύθων Arist.Pol. 1336a30

    ;

    ὁ λ... μῦθός ἐστι Ael.NA4.34

    .
    4 speech, delivered in court, assembly, etc.,

    χρήσομαι τῇ τοῦ λ. τάξει ταύτῃ Aeschin.3.57

    , cf. Arist.Rh. 1358a38;

    δικανικοὶ λ. Id.EN 1181a4

    ;

    τρία γένη τῶν λ. τῶν ῥητορικῶν, συμβουλευτικόν, δικανικόν, ἐπιδεικτικόν Id.Rh. 1358b7

    ;

    τῷ γράψαντι τὸν λ. Thphr. Char.17.8

    , cf.

    λογογράφος 11

    ; ἐπιτάφιος λ. funeral oration, Pl.Mx. 236b; esp. of the body of a speech, opp. ἐπίλογος, Arist.Rh. 1420b3; opp. προοίμιον, ib. 1415a12; body of a law, opp. proem, Pl.Lg. 723b; spoken, opp. written word,

    τὸν τοῦ εἰδότος λ. ζῶντα καὶ ἔμψυχον οὗ ὁ γεγραμμένος εἴδωλόν τι Id.Phdr. 276a

    ; ὁ ἐκ τοῦ βιβλίου ῥηθεὶς [λ.] speech read from a roll, ib. 243c; published speech, D.C.40.54; rarely of the speeches in Tragedy ([etym.] ῥήσεις), Arist.Po. 1450b6,9.
    VI verbal expression or utterance (cf. λέγω (B) 111), rarely a single word, v. infr. b, never in Gramm. signf. of vocable ([etym.] ἔπος, λέξις, ὄνομα, ῥῆμα), usu. of a phrase, cf. IX. 3 (the only sense found in [dialect] Ep.).
    a pl., without Art., talk,

    τὸν ἔτερπε λόγοις Il.15.393

    ;

    αἱμύλιοι λ. Od.1.56

    , h.Merc. 317, Hes.Th. 890, Op.78, 789, Thgn.704, A.R.3.1141; ψευδεῖς Λ., personified, Hes.Th. 229;

    ἀφροδίσιοι λ. Semon.7.91

    ;

    ἀγανοῖσι λ. Pi.P. 4.101

    ; ὄψον δὲ λ. φθονεροῖσιν tales, Id.N.8.21; σμικροὶ λ. brief words, S.Aj. 1268 (s.v.l.), El. 415; δόκησις ἀγνὼς λόγων bred of talk, Id.OT 681 (lyr.): also in sg., λέγ' εἴ σοι τῷ λ. τις ἡδονή speak if thou delightest in talking, Id.El. 891.
    b sg., expression, phrase,

    πρὶν εἰπεῖν ἐσθλὸν ἢ κακὸν λ. Id.Ant. 1245

    , cf. E.Hipp. 514;

    μυρίας ὡς εἰπεῖν λόγῳ Hdt.2.37

    ; μακρὸς λ. rigmarole, Simon.189, Arist.Metaph. 1091a8; λ. ἠρέμα λεχθεὶς διέθηκε τὸ πόρρω a whispered message, Plot.4.9.3; ἑνὶ λόγῳ to sum up, in brief phrase, Pl.Phdr. 241e, Phd. 65d; concisely, Arist. EN 1103b21 (but also, = ἁπλῶς, περὶ πάντων ἑνὶ λ. Id.GC 325a1): pl., λ. θελκτήριοι magic words, E.Hipp. 478; rarely of single words,

    λ. εὐσύνθετος οἷον τὸ χρονοτριβεῖν Arist.Rh. 1406a36

    ; οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ λ. answered her not a word, Ev.Matt.15.23.
    c coupled or contrasted with words expressed or understood signifying act, fact, truth, etc., mostly in a depreciatory sense,

    λ. ἔργου σκιή Democr. 145

    ;

    ὥσπερ μικρὸν παῖδα λόγοις μ' ἀπατᾷς Thgn.254

    ; λόγῳ, opp. ἔργῳ, Democr.82, etc.;

    νηπίοισι οὐ λ. ἀλλὰ ξυμφορὴ διδάσκαλος Id.76

    ;

    ἔργῳ κοὐ λόγῳ τεκμαίρομαι A.Pr. 338

    , cf. S.El.59, OC 782;

    λόγῳ μὲν λέγουσι.. ἔργῳ δὲ οὐκ ἀποδεικνῦσι Hdt.4.8

    ;

    οὐ λόγων, φασίν, ἡ ἀγορὴ δεῖται, χαλκῶν δέ Herod.7.49

    ;

    οὔτε λ. οὔτε ἔργῳ Lys.9.14

    ; λόγοις, opp. ψήφῳ, Aeschin.2.33; opp. νόῳ, Hdt.2.100;

    οὐ λόγῳ μαθών E.Heracl.5

    ;

    ἐκ λόγων, κούφου πράγματος Pl.Lg. 935a

    ; λόγοισι εἰς τὸ πιθανὸν περιπεπεμμένα ib. 886e, cf. Luc.Anach.19;

    ἵνα μὴ λ. οἴησθε εἶναι, ἀλλ' εἰδῆτε τὴν ἀλήθειαν Lycurg.23

    , cf. D.30.34; opp. πρᾶγμα, Arist.Top. 146a4; opp. βία, Id.EN 1179b29, cf. 1180a5; opp. ὄντα, Pl.Phd. 100a; opp. γνῶσις, 2 Ep.Cor.11.6; λόγῳ in pretence, Hdt.1.205, Pl.R. 361b, 376d, Ti. 27a, al.; λόγου ἕνεκα merely as a matter of words,

    ἄλλως ἕνεκα λ. ἐλέγετο Id.Cri. 46d

    ; λόγου χάριν, opp. ὡς ἀληθῶς, Arist.Pol. 1280b8; but also, let us say, for instance, Id.EN 1144a33, Plb.10.46.4, Phld. Sign.29, M.Ant.4.32; λόγου ἕνεκα let us suppose, Pl.Tht. 191c; ἕως λόγου, μέχρι λ., = Lat. verbo tenus, Plb.10.24.7, Epict.Ench.16: sts. without depreciatory force, the antithesis or parallelism being verbal (cf. 'word and deed'),

    λόγῳ τε καὶ σθένει S.OC68

    ;

    ἔν τε ἔργῳ καὶ λ. Pl.R. 382e

    , cf. D.S.13.101, Ev.Luc.24.19, Act.Ap.7.22, Paus.2.16.2; ὅσα μὲν λόγῳ εἶπον, opp. τὰ ἔργα τῶν πραχθέντων, Th. 1.22.
    2 common talk, report, tradition,

    ὡς λ. ἐν θνητοῖσιν ἔην Batr. 8

    ;

    λ. ἐκ πατέρων Alc.71

    ;

    οὐκ ἔστ' ἔτυμος λ. οὗτος Stesich.32

    ;

    διξὸς λέγεται λ. Hdt.3.32

    ;

    λ. ὑπ' Αἰγυπτίων λεγόμενος Id.2.47

    ; νέον [λ.] tidings, S.Ant. 1289 (lyr.); τὰ μὲν αὐτοὶ ὡρῶμεν, τὰ δὲ λόγοισι ἐπυνθανόμεθα by hearsay, Hdt.2.148: also in pl., ἐν γράμμασιν λόγοι κείμενοι traditions, Pl.Lg. 886b.
    b rumour,

    ἐπὶ παντὶ λ. ἐπτοῆσθαι Heraclit. 87

    ; αὐδάεις λ. voice of rumour, B.14.44; περὶ θεῶν διῆλθεν ὁ λ. ὅτι .. Th.6.46; λ. παρεῖχεν ὡς .. Plb.3.89.3; ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λ. οὗτος εῖς τινας ὅτι .. Ev.Jo.21.23, cf. Act.Ap.11.22; fiction, Ev.Matt.28.15.
    c mention, notice, description, οὐκ ὕει λόγου ἄξιον οὐδέν worth mentioning, Hdt.4.28, cf. Plb.1.24.8, etc.; ἔργα λόγου μέζω beyond expression, Hdt.2.35; κρεῖσσον λόγου τὸ εἶδος τῆς νόσου beyond description, Th. 2.50;

    μείζω ἔργα ἢ ὡς τῷ λ. τις ἂν εἴποι D.6.11

    .
    d the talk one occasions, repute, mostly in good sense, good report, praise, honour (cf. supr. 1.4),

    πολλὰ φέρειν εἴωθε λ... πταίσματα Thgn.1221

    ;

    λ. ἐσλὸν ἀκοῦσαι Pi.I.5(4).13

    ;

    πλέονα.. λ. Ὀδυσσέος ἢ πάθαν Id.N.7.21

    ;

    ἵνα λ. σε ἔχῃ πρὸς ἀνθρώπων ἀγαθός Hdt.7.5

    , cf. 9.78; Τροίαν.. ἧς ἁπανταχοῦ λ. whose fame, story fills the world, E.IT 517;

    οὐκ ἂν ἦν λ. σέθεν Id.Med. 541

    : less freq. in bad sense, evil report, λ. κακόθρους, κακός, S. Aj. 138 (anap.), E.Heracl. 165: pl., λόγους ψιθύρους πλάσσων slanders, S.Aj. 148 (anap.).
    e λ. ἐστί, ἔχει, κατέχει, the story goes, c. acc. et inf.,

    ἔστ τις λ. τὰν Ἀρετὰν ναίειν Simon.58.1

    , cf. S.El. 417; λ. μὲν ἔστ' ἀρχαῖος ὡς .. Id.Tr.1; λ. alone, E.Heracl.35;

    ὡς λ. A.Supp. 230

    , Pl. Phlb. 65c, etc.;

    λ. ἐστί Hdt.7.129

    ,9.26, al.;

    λ. αἰὲν ἔχει S.OC 1573

     (lyr.); ὅσον ὁ λ. κατέχει tradition prevails, Th.1.10: also with a personal subject in the reverse construction. Κλεισθένης λ. ἔχει τὴν Πυθίην ἀναπεῖσαι has the credit of.., Hdt.5.66, cf. Pl.Epin. 987b, 988b;

    λ. ἔχοντα σοφίας Ep.Col.2.23

    , v.supr.1.4.
    3 discussion, debate, deliberation,

    πολλὸς ἦν ἐν τοῖσι λ. Hdt.8.59

    ;

    συνελέχθησαν οἱ Μῆδοι ἐς τὠυτὸ καὶ ἐδίδοσαν σφίσι λόγον, λέγοντες περὶ τῶν κατηκόντων Id.1.97

    ;

    οἱ Πελασγοὶ ἑωυτοῖσι λόγους ἐδίδοσαν Id.6.138

    ;

    πολέμῳ μᾶλλον ἢ λόγοις τὰ ἐγκλήματα διαλύεσθαι Th.1.140

    ;

    οἱ περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης λ. Aeschin.2.74

    ; τοῖς ἔξωθεν λ. πεπλήρωκε τὸν λ. [Plato] has filled his dialogue with extraneous discussions, Arist.Pol. 1264b39;

    τὸ μῆκος τῶν λ. D.Chr.7.131

    ; μεταβαίνων ὁ λ. εἰς ταὐτὸν ἀφῖκται our debate, Arist.EN 1097a24; ὁ παρὼν λ. ib. 1104a11; θεῶν ὧν νῦν ὁ λ. ἐστί discussion, Pl.Ap. 26b, cf. Tht. 184a, M.Ant.8.32; τῷ λ. διελθεῖν, διϊέναι, Pl.Prt. 329c, Grg. 506a, etc.; τὸν λ. διεξελθεῖν conduct the debate, Id.Lg. 893a; ξυνελθεῖν ἐς λόγον confer, Ar.Eq. 1300: freq. in pl., ἐς λόγους συνελθόντες parley, Hdt. 1.82; ἐς λ. ἐλθεῖν τινι have speech with, ib.86;

    ἐς λ. ἀπικέσθαι τινί Id.2.32

    ;

    διὰ λόγων ἰέναι E.Tr. 916

    ;

    ἐμαυτῇ διὰ λ. ἀφικόμην Id.Med. 872

    ;

    ἐς λ. ἄγειν τινά X.HG4.1.2

    ;

    κοινωνεῖν λόγων καὶ διανοίας Arist.EN 1170b12

    .
    b right of discussion or speech, ἢ 'πὶ τῷ πλήθει λ.; S.OC 66; λ. αἰτήσασθαι ask leave to speak, Th.3.53;

    λ. διδόναι X.HG5.2.20

    ; οὐ προυτέθη σφίσιν λ. κατὰ τὸν νόμον ib.1.7.5;

    λόγου τυχεῖν D.18.13

    , cf. Arist.EN 1095b21, Plb.18.52.1;

    οἱ λόγου τοὺς δούλους ἀποστεροῦντες Arist.Pol. 1260b5

    ;

    δοῦλος πέφυκας, οὐ μέτεστί σοι λόγου Trag.Adesp.304

    ;

    διδόντας λ. καὶ δεχομένους ἐν τῷ μέρει Luc.Pisc.8

    : hence, time allowed for a speech,

    ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ λ. And.1.26

    ,al.;

    ἐν τῷ ἑαυτοῦ λ. Pl.Ap. 34a

    ;

    οὐκ ἐλάττω λ. ἀνήλωκε D.18.9

    .
    c dialogue, as a form of philosophical debate,

    ἵνα μὴ μαχώμεθα ἐν τοῖς λ. ἐγώ τε καὶ σύ Pl. Cra. 430d

    ;

    πρὸς ἀλλήλους τοὺς λ. ποιεῖσθαι Id.Prt. 348a

    : hence, dialogue as a form of literature,

    οἱ Σωκρατικοὶ λ. Arist.Po. 1447b11

    , Rh. 1417a20; cf. διάλογος.
    d section, division of a dialogue or treatise (cf. v. 3),

    ὁ πρῶτος λ. Pl.Prm. 127d

    ; ὁ πρόσθεν, ὁ παρελθὼν λ., Id.Phlb. 18e, 19b;

    ἐν τοῖς πρώτοις λ. Arist.PA 682a3

    ; ἐν τοῖς περὶ κινήσεως λ. in the discussion of motion (i. e. Ph.bk.8), Id.GC 318a4;

    ἐν τῷ περὶ ἐπαίνου λ. Phld.Rh.1.219

    ; branch, department, division of a system of philosophy,

    τὴν φρόνησιν ἐκ τριῶν συνεστηκέναι λ., τῶν φυσικῶν καὶ τῶν ἠθικῶν καὶ τῶν λογικῶν Chrysipp.Stoic.2.258

    .
    e in pl., literature, letters, Pl.Ax. 365b, Epin. 975d, D.H.Comp.1,21 (but, also in pl., treatises, Plu.2.16c);

    οἱ ἐπὶ λόγοις εὐδοκιμώτατοι Hdn.6.1.4

    ; Λόγοι, personified, AP9.171 (Pall.).
    VII a particular utterance, saying:
    1 divine utterance, oracle, Pi.P.4.59;

    λ. μαντικοί Pl. Phdr. 275b

    ;

    οὐ γὰρ ἐμὸν ἐρῶ τὸν λ. Pl.Ap. 20e

    ;

    ὁ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ Apoc.1.2

    ,9.
    2 proverb, maxim, saying, Pi.N.9.6, A.Th. 218; ὧδ' ἔχει λ. ib. 225; τόνδ' ἐκαίνισεν λ. ὡς .. Critias 21, cf. Pl.R. 330a, Ev.Jo.4.37;

    ὁ παλαιὸς λ. Pl.Phdr. 240c

    , cf. Smp. 195b, Grg. 499c, Lg. 757a, 1 Ep.Ti.1.15, Plu.2.1082e, Luc.Alex.9, etc.;

    τὸ τοῦ λόγου δὴ τοῦτο Herod.2.45

    , cf. D.Chr.66.24, Luc.JTr.3, Alciphr.3.56, etc.: pl., Arist.EN 1147a21.
    3 assertion, opp. oath, S.OC 651; ψιλῷ λ. bare word, opp. μαρτυρία, D.27.54.
    4 express resolution, κοινῷ λ. by common consent, Hdt.1.141,al.; ἐπὶ λ. τοιῷδε, ἐπ' ᾧ τε .. on the following terms, Id.7.158, cf. 9.26;

    ἐνδέξασθαι τὸν λ. Id.1.60

    , cf. 9.5; λ. ἔχοντες πλεονέκτην a greedy proposal, Id.7.158: freq. in pl., terms, conditions, Id.9.33, etc.
    5 word of command, behest, A.Pr.17,40 (both pl.), Pers. 363;

    ἀνθρώπους πιθανωτέρους ποιεῖν λόγῳ X.Oec.13.9

    ;

    ἐξέβαλε τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ Ev.Matt.8.16

    ; οἱ δέκα λ. the ten Commandments, LXX Ex.34.28, Ph.1.496.
    VIII thing spoken of, subject-matter (cf. 111.1 b and 2),

    λ. τοῦτον ἐάσομεν Thgn.1055

    ; προπεπυσμένος πάντα λ. the whole matter, Hdt.1.21, cf. 111; τὸν ἐόντα λ. the truth of the matter, ib.95, 116; μετασχεῖν τοῦ λ. to be in the secret, ib. 127;

    μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ τὸν λ. τοῦτον εῐπῃς Id.8.65

    ; τίς ἦν λ.; S.OT 684 ( = πρᾶγμα, 699); περί τινος λ. διελεγόμεθα subject, question, Pl.Prt. 314c; [τὸ προοίμιον] δεῖγμα τοῦ λ. case, Arist.Rh. 1415a12, cf. 111.1b; τέλος δὲ παντὸς τοῦ λ. ψηφίζονται the end of the matter was that.., Aeschin.3.124;

    οὐκ ἔστεξε τὸν λ. Plb.8.12.5

    ;

    οὐκ ἔστι σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λ. τούτῳ Act.Ap.8.21

    ;

    ἱκανὸς αὐτῷ ὁ λ. Pl.Grg. 512c

    ; οὐχ ὑπολείπει [Γοργίαν] ὁ λ. matter for talk, Arist.Rh. 1418a35;

    μηδένα λ. ὑπολιπεῖν Isoc.4.146

    ; πρὸς λόγον to the point, apposite,

    οὐδὲν πρὸς λ. Pl.Phlb. 42e

    , cf. Prt. 344a;

    ἐὰν πρὸς λ. τι ᾖ Id.Phlb. 33c

    ; also

    πρὸς λόγου Id.Grg. 459c

     (s. v.l.).
    2 plot of a narrative or dramatic poem, = μῦθος, Arist.Po. 1455b17, al.
    b in Art, subject of a painting,

    ζωγραφίας λόγοι Philostr.VA 6.10

    ;

    λ. τῆς γραφῆς Id.Im.1.25

    .
    3 thing talked of, event,

    μετὰ τοὺς λ. τούτους LXX 1 Ma.7.33

    , cf. Act.Ap.15.6.
    IX expression, utterance, speech regarded formally, τὸ ἀπὸ [ψυχῆς] ῥεῦμα διὰ τοῦ στόματος ἰὸν μετὰ φθόγγου λ., opp. διάνοια, Pl.Sph. 263e; intelligent utterance, opp. φωνή, Arist.Pol. 1253a14;

    λ. ἐστὶ φωνὴ σημαντικὴ κατὰ συνθήκην Id.Int. 16b26

    , cf. Diog.Bab.Stoic.3.213; ὅθεν (from the heart)

    ὁ λ. ἀναπέμπεται Stoic.2.228

    , cf. 244; Protagoras was nicknamed λόγος, Hsch. ap. Sch.Pl.R. 600c, Suid.;

    λόγου πειθοῖ Democr.181

    : in pl., eloquence, Isoc.3.3,9.11;

    τὴν ἐν λόγοις εὐρυθμίαν Epicur.Sent.Pal.5p.69

     v. d. M.; λ. ἀκριβής precise language, Ar.Nu. 130 (pl.), cf. Arist.Rh. 1418b1;

    τοῦ μὴ ᾀδομένου λ. Pl.R. 398d

    ; ἡδυσμένος λ., of rhythmical language set to music, Arist.Po. 1449b25; ἐν παντὶ λ. in all manner of utterance, 1 Ep.Cor.1.5; ἐν λόγοις in orations, Arist.Po. 1459a13; λ. γελοῖοι, ἀσχήμονες, ludicrous, improper speech, Id.SE 182b15, Pol. 1336b14.
    2 of various modes of expression, esp. artistic and literary,

    ἔν τε ᾠδαῖς καὶ μύθοις καὶ λόγοις Pl.Lg. 664a

    ;

    ἐν λόγῳ καὶ ἐν ᾠδαῖς X.Cyr.1.4.25

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 835b; prose, opp. ποίησις, Id.R. 390a; opp. ψιλομετρία, Arist.Po. 1448a11; opp. ἔμμετρα, ib. 1450b15 (pl.); τῷ λ. τοῦτο τῶν μέτρων (sc. τὸ ἰαμβεῖον)

    ὁμοιότατον εἶναι Id.Rh. 1404a31

    ; in full, ψιλοὶ λ. prose, ib. b33 (but ψιλοὶ λ., = arguments without diagrams, Pl.Tht. 165a); λ. πεζοί, opp. ποιητική, D.H.Comp.6; opp. ποιήματα, ib.15;

    κοινὰ καὶ ποιημάτων καὶ λόγων Phld.Po.5.7

    ; πεζὸς λ. ib.27, al.
    b of the constituents of lyric or dramatic poetry, words,

    τὸ μέλος ἐκ τριῶν.. λόγου τε καὶ ἁρμονίας καὶ ῥυθμοῦ Pl.R. 398d

    ; opp. πρᾶξις, Arist.Po. 1454a18; dramatic dialogue, opp. τὰ τοῦ χοροῦ, ib. 1449a17.
    3 Gramm., phrase, complex term, opp. ὄνομα, Id.SE 165a13; λ. ὀνοματώδης noun- phrase, Id.APo. 93b30, cf. Rh. 1407b27; expression, D.H.Th.2, Demetr.Eloc.92.
    b sentence, complete statement, "

    ἄνθρωπος μανθάνει λόγον εἶναί φῃς.. ἐλάχιστόν τε καὶ πρῶτον Pl.Sph. 262c

    ;

    λ. αὐτοτελής A.D.Synt.3.6

    , D.T.634.1; ῥηθῆναι λόγῳ to be expressed in a sentence, Pl.Tht. 202b; λ. ἔχειν to be capable of being so expressed, ib. 201e, cf. Arist.Rh. 1404b26.
    c language, τὰ τοῦ λ. μέρη parts of speech, Chrysipp.Stoic.2.31, S.E.M.9.350, etc.;

    τὰ μόρια τοῦ λ. D.H.Comp.6

    ;

    μέρος λ. D.T.633.26

    , A.D.Pron.4.6, al. (but ἓν μέρος <τοῦ cod.> λόγου one word, Id.Synt.340.10, cf. 334.22); περὶ τῶν στοιχείων τοῦ λ., title of work by Chrysippus.
    X the Word or Wisdom of God, personified as his agent in creation and world-government,

    ὁ παντοδύναμός σου λ. LXX Wi.18.15

    ;

    ὁ ἐκ νοὸς φωτεινὸς λ. υἱὸς θεοῦ Corp.Herm.1.6

    , cf. Plu.2.376c; λ. θεοῦ δι' οὗ κατεσκευάσθη [ὁ κόσμος] Ph.1.162; τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ σοφίας· ἡ δέ ἐστιν ὁ θεοῦ λ. ib.56; λ. θεῖος.. εἰκὼν θεοῦ ib. 561, cf. 501; τὸν τομέα τῶν συμπάντων [θεοῦ] λ. ib. 492; τὸν ἄγγελον ὅς ἐστι λ. ib. 122: in NT identified with the person of Christ,

    ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λ. Ev.Jo.1.1

    , cf. 14, 1 Ep.Jo.2.7, Apoc.19.13;

    ὁ λ. τῆς ζωῆς 1 Ep.Jo.1.1

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > λόγος

  • 30 πῦρ

    πῦρ, ός, τό (Hom.+) fire
    ⓐ of earthly fire, as an important element in creation Dg 7:2.—Mt 17:15; Mk 9:22; Ac 28:5; Js 5:3 (cp. 4 Macc 15:15); ITr 2:3. Melting lead 2 Cl 16:3. Necessary for forging metals Dg 2:3. Testing precious metals for purity 1 Pt 1:7; Hv 4, 3, 4; in metaphor Rv 3:18. For ἄνθρακες πυρός Ro 12:20 s. ἄνθραξ. For κάμινος (τοῦ) πυρός (Iren. 5, 5, 2 [Harv. II 332, 2) 1 Cl 45:7; 2 Cl 8:2 s. κάμινος. For βάλλειν εἰς (τὸ) π. s. βάλλω 1b.—περιάπτειν πῦρ kindle a fire Lk 22:55. κατακαίειν τι πυρί burn someth. (up) with fire, in a pass. construction Mt 13:40; τινὰ ἐν πυρὶ Rv 17:16 (v.l. without ἐν). Pass. construction 18:8. ὑπὸ πυρὸς κατακαίεσθαι MPol 5:2 (κατακαίω, end). πῦρ καιόμενον 11:2b (καίω 1a). πυρὶ καίεσθαι Hb 12:18; Rv 8:8 (καίω 1a). Fire is used in comparisons γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός Ac 2:3 (Ezek. Trag. 234 [in Eus., PE 9, 29, 14] ἀπʼ οὐρανοῦ φέγγος ὡς πυρὸς ὤφθη ἡμῖν). φλὸξ πυρός a flame of fire (Ex 3:2; Is 29:6; PsSol 15:4; JosAs 14:9): ὀφθαλμοὶ ὡς φλὸξ πυρός Rv 1:14; cp. 2:18; 19:12.—Of a Christian worker who has built poorly in the congregation it is said σωθήσεται ὡς διὰ πυρός he will be saved as if through (the) fire, i.e. like a person who must pass through a wall of fire to escape fr. a burning house (Ps.-Crates, Ep. 6 [=Malherbe p. 56] κἂν διὰ πυρός; Jos., Ant. 17, 264 διὰ τοῦ πυρός; Diod S 1, 57, 7; 8 διὰ τοῦ φλογὸς … σωθείς from a burning tent) 1 Cor 3:15 (HHollander, NTS 40, ’94, 89–104; s. σῴζω 3). Cp. Jd 23 (ἁρπάζω 2a).—Of the torture of a loyal confessor by fire IRo 5:3; ISm 4:2; MPol 2:3; 11:2a; 13:3; 15:1f; 16:1; 17:2; cp. Hb 11:34; in imagery of Rome ἀπέρχομαι εἰς κάμινον πυρός AcPl Ha 6, 20 (cp. b below).
    ⓑ of fire that is heavenly in origin and nature (cp. Diod S 4, 2, 3 of the ‘fire’ of lightning, accompanying the appearance of Zeus; 16, 63, 3 τὸ θεῖον πῦρ; Just., D. 88, 3 πῦρ ἀνήφθη ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῳ [at Jesus’ baptism]. In gnostic speculation Iren. 1, 17, 1 [Harv. I 164, 14]; Hippol., Ref. 6, 9, 5.—Orig., C. Cels. 4, 13, 19): an angel appears to Moses ἐν φλογὶ πυρὸς βάτου in the flame of a burning thorn-bush Ac 7:30 (s. Ex 3:2; cp. Just., A I, 62, 3 ἐν ἰδέᾳ πυρός.—PKatz, ZNW 46, ’55, 133–38). God makes τοὺς λειτουργοὺς αὐτοῦ πυρὸς φλόγα (cp. Ps 103:4, esp. in the v.l. [ARahlfs, Psalmi cum Odis ’31]) Hb 1:7; 1 Cl 36:3. Corresp., there burn before the heavenly throne seven λαμπάδες πυρός Rv 4:5 and the ‘strong angel’ 10:1 has πόδες ὡς στῦλοι πυρός, but both of these pass. fit equally well in a. Fire appears mostly as a means used by God to execute punishment: in the past, in the case of Sodom ἔβρεξεν πῦρ καὶ θεῖον ἀπʼ οὐρανοῦ Lk 17:29 (Gen 19:24; cp. 1QH 3:31). Cp. Lk 9:54 (4 Km 1:10, 12; TestAbr A 10 p. 88, 13 [Stone p. 24, 13] ἐξ οὐρανοῦ; Jos., Ant. 9, 23 πῦρ ἀπʼ οὐρανοῦ πεσόν). Quite predom. in connection w. the Last Judgment: the end of the world διʼ αἵματος καὶ πυρός Hv 4, 3, 3; cp. Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3. Also Sib-Or 4, 173; 5, 376f); Rv 8:7. κόσμος αἴρεται ἐν πυρί AcPl Ha 2, 26; 9, 11. The Judgment Day ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται makes its appearance with fire 1 Cor 3:13a; cp. 13b (JGnilka, Ist 1 Cor 3:10–15 … Fegfeuer? ’55); 2 Pt 3:7 (on first-century cosmological views s. FDowning, L’AntCl 64, ’95, 99–109, esp. 107f). When Jesus comes again he will reveal himself w. his angels ἐν πυρὶ φλογός (cp. Sir 45:19) 2 Th 1:8. Oft. in Rv: fire is cast fr. heaven upon the earth 8:5; 13:13; 20:9 (καταβαίνω 1b). It proceeds fr. the mouths of God’s two witnesses 11:5 and fr. the mouths of plague-bringing horses 9:17f. See 16:8. For πυρὸς ζῆλος ἐσθίειν μέλλοντος τ. ὑπεναντίους Hb 10:27 s. ζῆλος 1, end. ἡ χείρ μου πυρὶ ἀποπίπτει ἀπʼ ἐμοῦ my hand falls off me from (burning in) the fire GJs 20:1 (codd.).—The fire w. which God punishes sinners (cp. ApcSed 4:1 κόλασις καὶ πῦρ ἐστιν ἡ παίδευσίς σου) οὐ σβέννυται (cp. Is 66:24) Mk 9:48; 2 Cl 7:6; 17:5. Hence it is called (s. PGM 5, 147 τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἀθάνατον): (τὸ) πῦρ (τὸ) αἰώνιον (4 Macc 12:12; TestZeb 10:3; GrBar 4:16; Just., A I, 21, 6 al.; Tat. 17, 1; Theoph. Ant. 1, 14 [p. 92, 9]) Mt 18:8; 25:41; Jd 7; Dg 10:7 (opp. τὸ πῦρ τὸ πρόσκαιρον 10:8). πῦρ ἄσβεστον (ἄσβεστος 1) Mt 3:12; Mk 9:43, 45 v.l.; Lk 3:17; 2 Cl 17:7; IEph 16:2; AcPl Ha 1, 22. It burns in the γέεννα (τοῦ) πυρός (ApcEsdr 1:9 p. 25, 1 Tdf.; s. γέεννα and cp. En 10:13 τὸ χάος τοῦ πυρός) Mt 5:22; 18:9 (cp. 1QS 2:7f); Mk 9:47 v.l.; 2 Cl 5:4 (a saying of Jesus not recorded elsewhere). ἡ λίμνη τοῦ πυρὸς (καὶ θείου) Rv 19:20; 20:10, 14ab, 15 (cp. Jos As 12, 10 ἄβυσσον τοῦ πυρός); cp. Rv 21:8; 14:10, 18; 15:2. The fiery place of punishment as ἡ κάμινος τοῦ πυρός Mt 13:42, 50 (difft. AcPl Ha 6, 20 see at the end of a, above). τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ fire awaits that person AcPlCor 2:37. The fire of hell is also meant in certain parables and allegories, in which trees and vines represent persons worthy of punishment Mt 3:10; 7:19; Lk 3:9; J 15:6. The one whose coming was proclaimed by John the Baptist βαπτίσει ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ καὶ πυρί; whether πῦρ in Mt 3:11; Lk 3:16 refers to reception of the Holy Spirit (esp. in Lk 3:16) or to the fire of divine judgment is debatable; for association of πῦρ with πνεῦμα s. Ac 2:3f; AcPlCor 2:13 (βαπτίζω 3b). As Lord of Judgment God is called πῦρ καταναλίσκον Hb 12:29 (Dt 4:24; 9:3.—Mesomedes calls Isis πῦρ τέλεον ἄρρητον [IAndrosIsis p. 145, 14]).—Of a different kind is the idea that fire is to be worshiped as a god (Maximus Tyr. 2, 4b of the Persians: πῦρ δέσποτα; Theosophien 14 p. 170, 11 τὸ πῦρ ἀληθῶς θεός) Dg 8:2.
    ⓒ fig. (Just., D. 8, 1 πῦρ ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ ἀνήφθη; Chariton 2, 4, 7 πῦρ εἰς τ. ψυχήν; Ael. Aristid. 28, 110 K.=49 p. 527 D.: τὸ ἱερὸν κ. θεῖον πῦρ τὸ ἐκ Διός; Aristaen., Ep. 2, 5; PGrenf I=Coll. Alex. p. 177 ln. 15 [II B.C.] of the fire of love; Theoph. Ant. 1, 3 [p. 62, 21] of God’s wrath) ἡ γλῶσσα πῦρ Js 3:6 (s. γλῶσσα 1a). The saying of Jesus πῦρ ἦλθον βαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν Lk 12:49 seems, in the context where it is now found, to refer to the fire of discord (s. vss. 51–53). πῦρ is also taken as fig. in Agr 3, the sense of which, however, cannot be determined w. certainty (s. Unknown Sayings, 54–56) ὁ ἐγγύς μου ἐγγὺς τοῦ πυρός. ὁ δὲ μακρὰν ἀπʼ ἐμοῦ μακρὰν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλείας (cp. ἐγγύς 3; ἐγγὺς εἶναι τοῦ πυρός as someth. dangerous also Chariton 6, 3, 9). On the difficult pass. πᾶς πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται Mk 9:49 and its variants s. ἁλίζω and cp. ἅλας b (s. also NColeman, JTS 24, 1923, 381–96, ET 48, ’37, 360–62; PHaupt, Salted with Fire: AJP 45, 1924, 242–45; AFridrichsen, Würzung durch Feuer: SymbOsl 4, 1926, 36–38; JdeZwaan, Met vuur gezouten worden, Mc 9:49: NThSt 11, 1928, 179–82; RHarris, ET 48, ’37, 185f; SEitrem, Opferritus u. Voropfer der Griechen u. Römer 1915, 309–44. JBauer, TZ 15, ’59, 446–50; HZimmermann [Mk 9:49], TQ 139, ’59, 28–39; TBaarda [Mk 9:49], NTS 5, ’59, 318–21).—B. 71; RAC VII 786–90; BHHW I 479f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πῦρ

  • 31 ἁμαρτία

    ἁμαρτία, ίας, ἡ (w. mngs. ranging fr. involuntary mistake/ error to serious offenses against a deity: Aeschyl., Antiphon, Democr.+; ins fr. Cyzicus JHS 27, 1907, p. 63 [III B.C.] ἁμαρτίαν μετανόει; PLips 119 recto, 3; POxy 1119, 11; LXX; En, TestSol, TestAbr, TestJob, Test12Patr; JosAs 12:14; ParJer, ApcEsdr, ApcSed, ApcMos; EpArist 192; Philo; Jos., Ant. 13, 69 al.; Ar. [Milne 76, 42]; Just., A I, 61, 6; 10; 66, 1, D. 13, 1 al.; Tat. 14, 1f; 20, 1; Mel., P. 50, 359; 55, 400; s. ClR 24, 1910, 88; 234; 25, 1911, 195–97).
    ① a departure fr. either human or divine standards of uprightness
    ⓐ sin (w. context ordinarily suggesting the level of heinousness), the action itself (ἁμάρτησις s. prec.), as well as its result (ἁμάρτημα), πᾶσα ἀδικία ἁ. ἐστίν 1J 5:17 (cp. Eur., Or. 649; Gen 50:17). ἁ. w. ἀνομήματα Hv 1, 3, 1; descr. as ἀνομία (cp. Ps 58:3; TestJob 43:17) 1J 3:4; but one who loves is far from sin Pol 3:3, cp. Js 5:20; 1 Pt 4:8, 1 Cl 49:5; Agr 13. ἀναπληρῶσαι τὰς ἁ. fill up the measure of sins (Gen 15:16) 1 Th 2:16. κοινωνεῖν ἁ. ἀλλοτρίαις 1 Ti 5:22. ποιεῖν ἁ. commit a sin (Tob 12:10; 14:7S; Dt 9:21) 2 Cor 11:7; 1 Pt 2:22; Js 5:15; 1J 3:4, 8. For this ἁμαρτάνειν ἁ. (Ex 32:30; La 1:8) 1J 5:16; ἐργάζεσθαι ἁ. Js 2:9; Hm 4, 1, 2 (LXX oft. ἐργάζ. ἀδικίαν or ἀνομίαν). μεγάλην ἁ. ἐργάζεσθαι commit a great sin m 4, 1, 1; 8:2. Pl. (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a τὰ μεγάλα ἁμαρτήματα κ. ἀδικήματα) Hs 7:2. ἐπιφέρειν ἁ. τινί Hv 1, 2, 4. ἑαυτῷ ἁ. ἐπιφέρειν bring sin upon oneself m 11:4; for this ἁ. ἐπισπᾶσθαί τινι m 4, 1, 8 (cp. Is 5:18). προστιθέναι ταῖς ἁ. add to one’s sins (cp. προσέθηκεν ἁμαρτίας ἐφʼ ἁμαρτίας PsSol 3:10) Hv 5:7; m 4, 3, 7; Hs 6, 2, 3; 8, 11, 3; φέρειν ἁ. 1 Cl 16:4 (Is 53:4). ἀναφέρειν vs. 14 (Is 53:12). γέμειν ἁμαρτιῶν B 11:11. εἶναι ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις 1 Cor 15:17 (cp. Alex. Aphr., Eth. Probl. 9 II 2 p. 129, 13 ἐν ἁμαρτήμασιν εἶναι).—Sin viewed from the perspective of God’s or Christ’s response: ἀφιέναι τὰς ἁ. let go = forgive sins (Lev 4:20 al.) Mt 9:2, 5f; Mk 2:5, 7, 9f; Lk 5:20ff; Hv 2, 2, 4; 1 Cl 50:5; 53:5 (Ex 32:32) al. (ἀφίημι 2); hence ἄφεσις (τῶν) ἁμαρτιῶν (Iren. 1, 21, 2 [Harv. I 182, 4]) forgiveness of sins Mt 26:28; Mk 1:4; Lk 1:77; 3:3; 24:47; Ac 2:38; 5:31; 10:43; 13:38; Hm 4, 3, 2; B 5:1; 6:11; 8:3; 11:1; 16:8. διδόναι ἄφεσιν ἁ. AcPl Ha 2, 30; λαβεῖν ἄφεσιν ἁ. receive forgiveness of sins Ac 26:18 (Just., D. 54 al); καθαρίζειν τὰς ἁ. cleanse the sins (thought of as a stain) Hs 5, 6, 3; καθαρίζειν ἀπὸ ἁ. 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4; cp. Sir 23:10; PsSol 10:1); also καθαρισμὸν ποιεῖσθαι τῶν ἁ. Hb 1:3; ἀπολούεσθαι τὰς ἁ. Ac 22:16 ([w. βαπτίζειν] Just., D. 13, 1 al.). λύτρον ἁ. ransom for sins B 19:10.—αἴρειν J 1:29; περιελεῖν ἁ. Hb 10:11; ἀφαιρεῖν (Ex 34:9; Is 27; 9) vs. 4; Hs 9, 28, 3; ῥυσθῆναι ἀπὸ ἁ. 1 Cl 60:3; ἀπὸ τῶν ἁ. ἀποσπασθῆναι AcPlCor 2:9. Sin as a burden αἱ ἁ. κατεβάρησαν Hs 9, 28, 6; as a disease ἰᾶσθαι Hs 9, 28, 5 (cp. Dt 30:3); s. also the verbs in question.—Looked upon as an entry in a ledger; hence ἐξαλείφεται ἡ ἁ. wiped away, cancelled (Ps 108:14; Jer 18:23; Is 43:25) Ac 3:19.—Opp. στῆσαι τὴν ἁ. 7:60; λογίζεσθαι ἁ. take account of sin (as a debt; cp. the commercial metaphor Ro 4:6 and s. FDanker, Gingrich Festschr. 104, n. 2) Ro 4:8 (Ps 31:2); 1 Cl 60:2 (Just., D. 141, 3). Pass. ἁ. οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται is not entered in the account Ro 5:13 (GFriedrich, TLZ 77, ’52, 523–28). Of sinners ὀφειλέτης ἁ. Pol 6:1 (cp. SIG 1042, 14–16 [II A.D.] ὸ̔ς ἂν δὲ πολυπραγμονήσῃ τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ ἢ περιεργάσηται, ἁμαρτίαν ὀφιλέτω Μηνὶ Τυράννωι, ἣν οὐ μὴ δύνηται ἐξειλάσασθαι).—γινώσκειν ἁ. (cp. Num 32:23) Ro 7:7; Hm 4, 1, 5. ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας Ro 3:20; ὁμολογεῖν τὰς ἁ. 1J 1:9; ἐξομολογεῖσθε ἐπὶ ταῖς ἁ. B 19:12; ἐξομολογεῖσθαι τὰς ἁ. Mt 3:6; Mk 1:5; Hv 3, 1, 5f; Hs 9, 23, 4; ἐξομολογεῖσθε ἀλλήλοις τὰς ἁ. confess your sins to each other Js 5:16.—ἐλέγχειν τινὰ περὶ ἁ. convict someone of sin J 8:46; cp. ἵνα σου τὰς ἁ. ἐλέγξω πρὸς τὸν κύριον that I might reveal your sins before the Lord Hv 1, 1, 5.—σεσωρευμένος ἁμαρτίαις loaded down w. sins 2 Ti 3:6; cp. ἐπισωρεύειν ταῖς ἁ. B 4:6; ἔνοχος τῆς ἁ. involved in the sin Hm 2:2; 4, 1, 5. μέτοχος τῆς ἁ. m 4, 1, 9.—In Hb sin is atoned for (ἱλάσκεσθαι τὰς ἁ. 2:17) by sacrifices θυσίαι ὑπὲρ ἁ. 5:1 (cp. 1 Cl 41:2). προσφορὰ περὶ ἁ. sin-offering 10:18; also simply περὶ ἁ. (Lev 5:11; 7:37) vss. 6, 8 (both Ps 39:7; cp. 1 Pt 3:18); προσφέρειν περὶ ἁ. bring a sin-offering Hb 5:3; cp. 10:12; 13:11. Christ has made the perfect sacrifice for sin 9:23ff; συνείδησις ἁ. consciousness of sin 10:2; ἀνάμνησις ἁ. a reminder of sins of the feast of atonement vs. 3.
    ⓑ special sins (ἁ. τῆς ἀποστασίας Iren. 5, 26, 2 [Harv. II 397, 4]): πρὸς θάνατον that leads to death 1J 5:16b (ἁμαρτάνω e); opp. οὐ πρὸς θάνατον vs. 17. μεγάλη ἁ. a great sin Hv 1, 1, 8 al. (Gen 20:9; Ex 32:30 al.; cp. Schol. on Pla., Tht. 189d ἁμαρτήματα μεγάλα). μείζων ἁ. m 11:4; ἥττων 1 Cl 47:4. μεγάλη κ. ἀνίατος Hm 5, 2, 4; τέλειαι ἁ. Hv 1, 2, 1; B 8:1, cp. τὸ τέλειον τῶν ἁ. 5:11 (Philo, Mos. 1, 96 κατὰ τῶν τέλεια ἡμαρτηκότων); ἡ προτέρα ἁ. (Arrian, Anab. 7, 23, 8 εἴ τι πρότερον ἡμάρτηκας) sin committed before baptism Hm 4, 1, 11; 4, 3, 3; Hs 8, 11, 3; cp. v 2, 1, 2.
    ② a state of being sinful, sinfulness, a prominent feature in Johannine thought, and opposed to ἀλήθεια; hence ἁ. ἔχειν J 9:41; 15:24; 1J 1:8. μείζονα ἁ. ἔχειν J 19:11; ἁ. μένει 9:41. γεννᾶσθαι ἐν ἁμαρτίαις be born in sin 9:34 (ἐν ἁμαρτίᾳ v.l).; opp. ἐν ἁ. ἀποθανεῖν die in sin 8:21, 24; AcPl Ha 1, 16. ἁ. ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν 1J 3:5.
    ③ a destructive evil power, sin
    ⓐ Paul thinks of sin almost in pers. terms (cp. Sir 27:10; Mel., P. 50, 359; PGM 4, 1448 w. other divinities of the nether world, also Ἁμαρτίαι χθόνιαι; Dibelius, Geisterwelt 119ff) as a ruling power that invades the world. Sin came into the world Ro 5:12 (JFreundorfer, Erbsünde u. Erbtod b. Ap. Pls 1927; ELohmeyer, ZNW 29, 1930, 1–59; JSchnitzer, D. Erbsünde im Lichte d. Religionsgesch. ’31; ROtto, Sünde u. Urschuld ’32; FDanker, Ro 5:12: Sin under Law: NTS 14, ’67/68, 424–39), reigns there vs. 21; 6:14; everything was subject to it Gal 3:22; people serve it Ro 6:6; are its slaves vss. 17, 20; are sold into its service 7:14 or set free from it 6:22; it has its law 7:23; 8:2; it revives (ἀνέζησεν) Ro 7:9 or is dead vs. 8; it pays its wages, viz., death 6:23, cp. 5:12 (see lit. s.v. ἐπί 6c). As a pers. principle it dwells in humans Ro 7:17, 20, viz., in the flesh (s. σάρξ 2cα) 8:3; cp. vs. 2; 7:25. The earthly body is hence a σῶμα τῆς ἁ. 6:6 (Col 2:11 v.l.).—As abstr. for concr. τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁ. ὑπέρ ἡμῶν ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν (God) made him, who never sinned, to be sin (i.e. the guilty one) for our sakes 2 Cor 5:21.
    ⓑ In Hb (as in OT) sin appears as the power that deceives humanity and leads it to destruction, whose influence and activity can be ended only by sacrifices (s. 1a end): ἀπάτη τῆς ἁ. Hb 3:13.—On the whole word s. ἁμαρτάνω, end. GMoore, Judaism I 445–52; ABüchler, Studies in Sin and Atonement in the Rabb. Lit. of the I Cent. 1928; WKnuth, D. Begriff der Sünde b. Philon v. Alex., diss. Jena ’34; EThomas, The Problem of Sin in the NT 1927; Dodd 76–81; DDaube, Sin, Ignorance and Forgiveness in the Bible, ’61; AGelin and ADescamps, Sin in the Bible, ’65.—On the special question ‘The Christian and Sin’ see PWernle 1897; HWindisch 1908; EHedström 1911; RBultmann, ZNW 23, 1924, 123–40; Windisch, ibid. 265–81; RSchulz, D. Frage nach der Selbsttätigkt. d. Menschen im sittl. Leben b. Pls., diss. Hdlb. ’40.—JAddison, ATR 33, ’51, 137–48; KKuhn, πειρασμός ἁμαρτία σάρξ im NT: ZTK 49, ’52, 200–222; JBremer, Hamartia ’69 (Gk. views).—B. 1182. EDNT. DELG s.v. ἁμαρτάνω. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἁμαρτία

  • 32 ὁ

    ὁ, ἡ, τό pl. οἱ, αἱ, τά article, derived fr. a demonstrative pronoun, ‘the’. Since the treatment of the inclusion and omission of the art. belongs to the field of grammar, the lexicon can limit itself to exhibiting the main features of its usage. It is difficult to set hard and fast rules for the employment of the art., since the writer’s style had special freedom of play here—Kühner-G. I p. 589ff; B-D-F §249–76; Mlt. 80–84; Rob. 754–96; W-S. §17ff; Rdm.2 112–18; Abel §28–32; HKallenberg, RhM 69, 1914, 642ff; FVölker, Syntax d. griech. Papyri I, Der Artikel, Progr. d. Realgymn. Münster 1903; FEakin, AJP 37, 1916, 333ff; CMiller, ibid. 341ff; EColwell, JBL 52, ’33, 12–21 (for a critique s. Mlt-H.-Turner III 183f); ASvensson, D. Gebr. des bestimmten Art. in d. nachklass. Epik ’37; RFink, The Syntax of the Greek Article ’53; JRoberts, Exegetical Helps, The Greek Noun with and without the Article: Restoration Qtly 14, ’71, 28–44; HTeeple, The Greek Article with Personal Names in the Synoptic Gospels: NTS 19, ’73, 302–17; Mussies 186–97.
    ① this one, that one, the art. funct. as demonstrative pronoun
    ⓐ in accordance w. epic usage (Hes., Works 450: ἡ=this [voice]) in the quot. fr. Arat., Phaenom. 5 τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν for we are also his (lit. this One’s) offspring Ac 17:28.
    ⓑ ὁ μὲν … ὁ δέ the one … the other (Polyaenus 6, 2, 1 ὁ μὲν … ὁ δὲ … ὁ δε; PSI 512, 21 [253 B.C.]); pl. οἱ μὲν … οἱ δέ (PSI 341, 9 [256 B.C.]; TestJob 29:1) some … others w. ref. to a noun preceding: ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος … οἱ μὲν ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις, οἱ δὲ σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις Ac 14:4; 17:32; 28:24; 1 Cor 7:7; Gal 4:23; Phil 1:16f. Also without such a relationship expressed τοὺς μὲν ἀποστόλους, τοὺς δὲ προφήτας, τοὺς δὲ εὐαγγελιστάς Eph 4:11. οἱ μὲν … ὁ δέ Hb 7:5f, 20f. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι (δέ) J 7:12. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι δὲ … ἕτεροι δέ Mt 16:14. τινὲς … οἱ δέ Ac 17:18 (cp. Pla., Leg. 1, 627a; 2, 658 B.; Aelian, VH 2, 34; Palaeph. 6, 5).—Mt 26:67; 28:17 οἱ δέ introduces a second class; just before this, instead of the first class, the whole group is mentioned (cp. X., Hell. 1, 2, 14, Cyr. 3, 2, 12; KMcKay, JSNT 24, ’85, 71f)= but some (as Arrian, Anab. 5, 2, 7; 5, 14, 4; Lucian, Tim. 4 p. 107; Hesych. Miles. [VI A.D.]: 390 Fgm. 1, 35 end Jac.).
    ⓒ To indicate the progress of the narrative, ὁ δέ, οἱ δέ but he, but they (lit. this one, they) is also used without ὁ μέν preceding (likew. Il. 1, 43; Pla., X.; also Clearchus, Fgm. 76b τὸν δὲ εἰπεῖν=but this man said; pap examples in Mayser II/1, 1926, 57f) e.g. Mt 2:9, 14; 4:4; 9:31; Mk 14:31 (cp. Just., A II, 2, 3). ὁ μὲν οὖν Ac 23:18; 28:5. οἱ μὲν οὖν 1:6; 5:41; 15:3, 30.—JO’Rourke, Paul’s Use of the Art. as a Pronoun, CBQ 34, ’72, 59–65.
    ② the, funct. to define or limit an entity, event, or state
    ⓐ w. nouns
    α. w. appellatives, or common nouns, where, as in Pla., Thu., Demosth. et al., the art. has double significance, specific or individualizing, and generic.
    א. In its individualizing use it focuses attention on a single thing or single concept, as already known or otherwise more definitely limited: things and pers. that are unique in kind: ὁ ἥλιος, ἡ σελήνη, ὁ οὐρανός, ἡ γῆ, ἡ θάλασσα, ὁ κόσμος, ἡ κτίσις, ὁ θεός (BWeiss [s. on θεός, beg.]), ὁ διάβολος, ὁ λόγος (J 1:1, 14), τὸ φῶς, ἡ σκοτία, ἡ ζωή, ὁ θάνατος etc. (but somet. the art. is omitted, esp. when nouns are used w. preps.; B-D-F §253, 1–4; Rob. 791f; Mlt-Turner 171). ἐν συναγωγῇ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ J 18:20.—Virtues, vices, etc. (contrary to Engl. usage): ἡ ἀγάπη, ἡ ἀλήθεια, ἡ ἁμαρτία, ἡ δικαιοσύνη, ἡ σοφία et al.—The individualizing art. stands before a common noun that was previously mentioned (without the art.): τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους Lk 9:16 (after πέντε ἄρτοι vs. 13). τὸ βιβλίον 4:17b (after βιβλίον, vs. 17a), τοὺς μάγους Mt 2:7 (after μάγοι, vs. 1). J 4:43 (40); 12:6 (5); 20:1 (19:41); Ac 9:17 (11); Js 2:3 (2); Rv 15:6 (1).—The individ. art. also stands before a common noun which, in a given situation, is given special attention as the only or obvious one of its kind (Hipponax [VI B.C.] 13, 2 West=D.3 16 ὁ παῖς the [attending] slave; Diod S 18, 29, 2 ὁ ἀδελφός=his brother; Artem. 4, 71 p. 245, 19 ἡ γυνή=your wife; ApcEsdr 6:12 p. 31, 17 μετὰ Μωσῆ … ἐν τῷ ὄρει [Sinai]; Demetr. (?): 722 fgm 7 Jac. [in Eus., PE 9, 19, 4] ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος [Moriah]) τῷ ὑπηρέτῃ to the attendant (who took care of the synagogue) Lk 4:20. εἰς τὸν νιπτῆρα into the basin (that was there for the purpose) J 13:5. ἰδοὺ ὁ ἄνθρωπο here is this (wretched) man 19:5. ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης or ἐλευθέρας by the (well-known) slave woman or the free woman (Hagar and Sarah) Gal 4:22f. τὸν σῖτον Ac 27:38. ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9 (s. ἐπιστολή) τὸ ὄρος the mountain (nearby) Mt 5:1; 8:1; 14:23; Mk 3:13; 6:46; Lk 6:12; 9:28 al.; ἡ πεισμονή this (kind of) persuasion Gal 5:8. ἡ μαρτυρία the (required) witness or testimony J 5:36.—The art. takes on the idea of κατʼ ἐξοχήν ‘par excellence’ (Porphyr., Abst. 24, 7 ὁ Αἰγύπτιος) ὁ ἐρχόμενος the one who is (was) to come or the coming one par excellence=The Messiah Mt 11:3; Lk 7:19. ὁ προφήτης J 1:21, 25; 7:40. ὁ διδάσκαλος τ. Ἰσραήλ 3:10 (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 5, 18 of Socrates: ὁ τῆς Ἑλλάδος διδάσκαλος); cp. MPol 12:2. With things (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Μάρπησσα: οἱ λίθοι=the famous stones [of the Parian Marble]) ἡ κρίσις the (last) judgment Mt 12:41. ἡ ἡμέρα the day of decision 1 Cor 3:13; (cp. Mi 4:6 Mt); Hb 10:25. ἡ σωτηρία (our) salvation at the consummation of the age Ro 13:11.
    ב. In its generic use it singles out an individual who is typical of a class, rather than the class itself: ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος Mt 12:35. κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον 15:11. ὥσπερ ὁ ἐθνικός 18:17. ὁ ἐργάτης Lk 10:7. ἐγίνωσκεν τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ J 2:25. τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου 2 Cor 12:12. ὁ κληρονόμος Gal 4:1. So also in parables and allegories: ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης Mt 24:43. Cp. J 10:11b, 12. The generic art. in Gk. is often rendered in Engl. by the indef. art. or omitted entirely.
    β. The use of the art. w. personal names is varied; as a general rule the presence of the art. w. a personal name indicates that the pers. is known; without the art. focus is on the name as such (s. Dssm., BPhW 22, 1902, 1467f; BWeiss, D. Gebr. des Art. b. d. Eigennamen [im NT]: StKr 86, 1913, 349–89). Nevertheless, there is an unmistakable drift in the direction of Mod. Gk. usage, in which every proper name has the art. (B-D-F §260; Rob. 759–61; Mlt-Turner 165f). The ms. tradition varies considerably. In the gospels the art. is usu. found w. Ἰησοῦς; yet it is commonly absent when Ἰ. is accompanied by an appositive that has the art. Ἰ. ὁ Γαλιλαῖος Mt 26:69; Ἰ. ὁ Ναζωραῖος vs. 71; Ἰ. ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός 27:17, 22. Sim. Μαριὰμ ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ Ἰ. Ac 1:14. The art. somet. stands before oblique cases of indecl. proper names, apparently to indicate their case (B-D-F §260, 2; Rob. 760). But here, too, there is no hard and fast rule.—HTeeple, NTS 19, ’73, 302–17 (synopt.).
    γ. The art. is customarily found w. the names of countries (B-D-F §261, 4; W-S. § 18, 5 d; Rob. 759f); less freq. w. names of cities (B-D-F §261, 1; 2; Rob. 760; Mlt-Turner 170–72). W. Ἰερουσαλήμ, Ἱεροσόλυμα it is usu. absent (s. Ἱεροσόλυμα); it is only when this name has modifiers that it must have the art. ἡ νῦν Ἰ. Gal 4:25; ἡ ἄνω Ἰ. vs. 26; ἡ καινὴ Ἰ. Rv 3:12. But even in this case it lacks the art. when the modifier follows: Hb 12:22.—Names of rivers have the art. ὁ Ἰορδάνης, ὁ Εὐφράτης, ὁ Τίβερις Hv 1, 1, 2 (B-D-F §261, 8; Rob. 760; Mlt-Turner 172). Likew. names of seas ὁ Ἀδρίας Ac 27:27.
    δ. The art. comes before nouns that are accompanied by the gen. of a pronoun (μοῦ, σοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, αὐτῶν) Mt 1:21, 25; 5:45; 6:10–12; 12:49; Mk 9:17; Lk 6:27; 10:7; 16:6; Ro 4:19; 6:6 and very oft. (only rarely is it absent: Mt 19:28; Lk 1:72; 2:32; 2 Cor 8:23; Js 5:20 al.).
    ε. When accompanied by the possessive pronouns ἐμός, σός, ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος the noun always has the art., and the pron. stands mostly betw. art. and noun: Mt 18:20; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:26; Ac 26:5; Ro 3:7 and oft. But only rarely so in John: J 4:42; 5:47; 7:16. He prefers to repeat the article w. the possessive following the noun ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμή J 5:30; cp. 7:6; 17:17; 1J 1:3 al.
    ζ. Adjectives (or participles), when they modify nouns that have the art., also come either betw. the art. and noun: ἡ ἀγαθὴ μερίς Lk 10:42; τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 12:10; Ac 1:8; ἡ δικαία κρίσις J 7:24 and oft., or after the noun w. the art. repeated τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον Mk 3:29; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15. ἡ ζωὴ ἡ αἰώνιος 1J 1:2; 2:25. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν Ac 12:10. Only rarely does an adj. without the art. stand before a noun that has an art. (s. B-D-F §270, 1; Rob. 777; Mlt-Turner 185f): ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ 1 Cor 11:5. εἶπεν μεγάλῃ τῇ φωνῇ Ac 14:10 v.l.; cp. 26:24. κοιναῖς ταῖς χερσίν Mk 7:5 D.—Double modifier τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον τὸ ἡτοιμασμένον τῷ διαβόλῳ Mt 25:41. τὸ θυσιαστήριον τὸ χρυσοῦν τὸ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου Rv 8:3; 9:13. ἡ πόρνη ἡ μεγάλη ἡ καθημένη 17:1.—Mk 5:36 τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον is prob. a wrong rdg. (B has τὸν λαλ., D τοῦτον τὸν λ. without λαλούμενον).—On the art. w. ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς s. the words in question.
    η. As in the case of the poss. pron. (ε) and adj. (ζ), so it is w. other expressions that can modify a noun: ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις Ro 9:11. ἡ παρʼ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη 11:27. ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἡ εἰς ζωήν Ro 7:10. ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 1 Th 1:8. ἡ διακονία ἡ εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 2 Cor 8:4.
    θ. The art. precedes the noun when a demonstrative pron. (ὅδε, οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging with it comes before or after; e.g.: οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος Lk 14:30; J 9:24. οὗτος ὁ λαός Mk 7:6. οὗτος ὁ υἱός μου Lk 15:24. οὗτος ὁ τελώνης 18:11 and oft. ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος Mk 14:71; Lk 2:25; 23:4, 14, 47. ὁ λαὸς οὗτος Mt 15:8. ὁ υἱός σου οὗτος Lk 15:30 and oft.—ἐκείνη ἡ ἡμέρα Mt 7:22; 22:46. ἐκ. ἡ ὥρα 10:19; 18:1; 26:55. ἐκ. ὁ καιρός 11:25; 12:1; 14:1. ἐκ. ὁ πλάνος 27:63 and oft. ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη Mt 7:25, 27. ἡ ὥρα ἐκ. 8:13; 9:22; ἡ γῆ ἐκ. 9:26, 31; ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκ. 13:1. ὁ ἀγρὸς ἐκ. vs. 44 and oft.—ὁ αὐτός s. αὐτός 3b.
    ι. An art. before a nom. noun makes it a vocative (as early as Hom.; s. KBrugman4-AThumb, Griech. Gramm. 1913, 431; Schwyzer II 63f; B-D-F §147; Rob. 769. On the LXX Johannessohn, Kasus 14f.—ParJer 1:1 Ἰερεμία ὁ ἐκλεκτός μου; 7:2 χαῖρε Βαρούχι ὁ οἰκονόμος τῆς πίστεως) ναί, ὁ πατήρ Mt 11:26. τὸ κοράσιον, ἔγειρε Mk 5:41. Cp. Mt 7:23; 27:29 v.l.; Lk 8:54; 11:39; 18:11, 13 (Goodsp, Probs. 85–87); J 19:3 and oft.
    ⓑ Adjectives become substantives by the addition of the art.
    α. ὁ πονηρός Eph 6:16. οἱ σοφοί 1 Cor 1:27. οἱ ἅγιοι, οἱ πλούσιοι, οἱ πολλοί al. Likew. the neut. τὸ κρυπτόν Mt 6:4. τὸ ἅγιον 7:6. τὸ μέσον Mk 3:3. τὸ θνητόν 2 Cor 5:4. τὰ ἀδύνατα Lk 18:27. τὸ ἔλαττον Hb 7:7. Also w. gen. foll. τὰ ἀγαθά σου Lk 16:25. τὸ μωρόν, τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 1:25; cp. vs. 27f. τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 1:19. τὰ ἀόρατα τοῦ θεοῦ vs. 20. τὸ ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου 8:3. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης 2 Cor 4:2.
    β. Adj. attributes whose noun is customarily omitted come to have substantive force and therefore receive the art. (B-D-F §241; Rob. 652–54) ἡ περίχωρος Mt 3:5; ἡ ξηρά 23:15 (i.e. γῆ). ἡ ἀριστερά, ἡ δεξιά (sc. χείρ) 6:3. ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (sc. ἡμέρα) Ac 16:11. ἡ ἔρημος (sc. χώρα) Mt 11:7.
    γ. The neut. of the adj. w. the art. can take on the mng. of an abstract noun (Thu. 1, 36, 1 τὸ δεδιός=fear; Herodian 1, 6, 9; 1, 11, 5 τὸ σεμνὸν τῆς παρθένου; M. Ant. 1, 1; Just., D. 27, 2 διὰ τὸ σκληροκάρδιον ὑμῶν καὶ ἀχάριστον εἰς αὐτόν) τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ God’s kindness Ro 2:4. τὸ δυνατόν power 9:22. τὸ σύμφορον benefit 1 Cor 7:35. τὸ γνήσιον genuineness 2 Cor 8:8. τὸ ἐπιεικές Phil 4:5 al.
    δ. The art. w. numerals indicates, as in Il. 5, 271f; X. et al. (HKallenberg, RhM 69, 1914, 662ff), that a part of a number already known is being mentioned (Diod S 18, 10, 2 τρεῖς μὲν φυλὰς … τὰς δὲ ἑπτά=‘but the seven others’; Plut., Cleom. 804 [8, 4] οἱ τέσσαρες=‘the other four’; Polyaenus 6, 5 οἱ τρεῖς=‘the remaining three’; Diog. L. 1, 82 Βίας προκεκριμένος τῶν ἑπτά=Bias was preferred before the others of the seven [wise men]. B-D-F §265): οἱ ἐννέα the other nine Lk 17:17. Cp. 15:4; Mt 18:12f. οἱ δέκα the other ten (disciples) 20:24; Mk 10:41; lepers Lk 17:17. οἱ πέντε … ὁ εἷς … ὁ ἄλλος five of them … one … the last one Rv 17:10.
    ⓒ The ptc. w. the art. receives
    α. the mng. of a subst. ὁ πειράζων the tempter Mt 4:3; 1 Th 3:5. ὁ βαπτίζων Mk 6:14. ὁ σπείρων Mt 13:3; Lk 8:5. ὁ ὀλεθρεύων Hb 11:28. τὸ ὀφειλόμενον Mt 18:30, 34. τὸ αὐλούμενον 1 Cor 14:7. τὸ λαλούμενον vs. 9 (Just., D. 32, 3 τὸ ζητούμενον). τὰ γινόμενα Lk 9:7. τὰ ἐρχόμενα J 16:13. τὰ ἐξουθενημένα 1 Cor 1:28. τὰ ὑπάρχοντα (s. ὑπάρχω 1). In Engl. usage many of these neuters are transl. by a relative clause, as in β below. B-D-F §413; Rob. 1108f.
    β. the mng. of a relative clause (Ar. 4, 2 al. οἱ νομίζοντες) ὁ δεχόμενος ὑμᾶς whoever receives you Mt 10:40. τῷ τύπτοντί σε Lk 6:29. ὁ ἐμὲ μισῶν J 15:23. οὐδὲ γὰρ ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον τὸ δεδομένον (ὸ̔ δέδοται) Ac 4:12. τινές εἰσιν οἱ ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς Gal 1:7. Cp. Lk 7:32; 18:9; J 12:12; Col 2:8; 1 Pt 1:7; 2J 7; Jd 4 al. So esp. after πᾶς: πᾶς ὁ ὀργιζόμενος everyone who becomes angry Mt 5:22. πᾶς ὁ κρίνων Ro 2:1 al. After μακάριος Mt 5:4, 6, 10. After οὐαὶ ὑμῖν Lk 6:25.
    ⓓ The inf. w. neut. art. (B-D-F §398ff; Rob. 1062–68) is used in a number of ways.
    α. It stands for a noun (B-D-F §399; Rob. 1062–66) τὸ (ἀνίπτοις χερσὶν) φαγεῖν Mt 15:20. τὸ (ἐκ νεκρῶν) ἀναστῆναι Mk 9:10. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν 12:33; cp. Ro 13:8. τὸ ποιῆσαι, τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι 2 Cor 8:11. τὸ καθίσαι Mt 20:23. τὸ θέλειν Ro 7:18; 2 Cor 8:10.—Freq. used w. preps. ἀντὶ τοῦ, διὰ τό, διὰ τοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ, ἐν τῷ, ἕνεκεν τοῦ, ἕως τοῦ, μετὰ τό, πρὸ τοῦ, πρὸς τό etc.; s. the preps. in question (B-D-F §402–4; Rob. 1068–75).
    β. The gen. of the inf. w. the art., without a prep., is esp. frequent (B-D-F §400; Mlt. 216–18; Rob. 1066–68; DEvans, ClQ 15, 1921, 26ff). The use of this inf. is esp. common in Lk and Paul, less freq. in Mt and Mk, quite rare in other writers. The gen. stands
    א. dependent on words that govern the gen.: ἄξιον 1 Cor 16:4 (s. ἄξιος 1c). ἐξαπορηθῆναι τοῦ ζῆν 2 Cor 1:8. ἔλαχε τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι Lk 1:9 (cp. 1 Km 14:47 v.l. Σαοὺλ ἔλαχεν τοῦ βασιλεύειν).
    ב. dependent on a noun (B-D-F §400, 1; Rob. 1066f) ὁ χρόνος τοῦ τεκεῖν Lk 1:57. ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν 2:6. ἐξουσία τοῦ πατεῖν 10:19. εὐκαιρία τοῦ παραδοῦναι 22:6. ἐλπὶς τοῦ σῴζεσθαι Ac 27:20; τοῦ μετέχειν 1 Cor 9:10. ἐπιποθία τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Ro 15:23. χρείαν ἔχειν τοῦ διδάσκειν Hb 5:12. καιρὸς τοῦ ἄρξασθαι 1 Pt 4:17. τ. ἐνέργειαν τοῦ δύνασθαι the power that enables him Phil 3:21. ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν zeal in desiring 2 Cor 8:11.
    ג. Somet. the connection w. the noun is very loose, and the transition to the consecutive sense (=result) is unmistakable (B-D-F §400, 2; Rob. 1066f): ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ τοῦ περιτεμεῖν αὐτόν Lk 2:21. ὀφειλέται … τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν Ro 8:12. εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι 1:24. ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν 11:8. τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 Cor 10:13.
    ד. Verbs of hindering, ceasing take the inf. w. τοῦ μή (s. Schwyzer II 372 for earlier Gk; PGen 16, 23 [207 A.D.] κωλύοντες τοῦ μὴ σπείρειν; LXX; ParJer 2:5 φύλαξαι τοῦ μὴ σχίσαι τὰ ἱμάτιά σου): καταπαύειν Ac 14:18. κατέχειν Lk 4:42. κρατεῖσθαι 24:16. κωλύειν Ac 10:47. παύειν 1 Pt 3:10 (Ps 33:14). ὑποστέλλεσθαι Ac 20:20, 27. Without μή: ἐγκόπτεσθαι τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Ro 15:22.
    ה. The gen. of the inf. comes after verbs of deciding, exhorting, commanding, etc. (1 Ch 19:19; ParJer 7:37 διδάσκων αὐτοὺ τοῦ ἀπέχεσθαι) ἐγένετο γνώμης Ac 20:3. ἐντέλλεσθαι Lk 4:10 (Ps 90:11). ἐπιστέλλειν Ac 15:20. κατανεύειν Lk 5:7. κρίνειν Ac 27:1. παρακαλεῖν 21:12. προσεύχεσθαι Js 5:17. τὸ πρόσωπον στηρίζειν Lk 9:51. συντίθεσθαι Ac 23:20.
    ו. The inf. w. τοῦ and τοῦ μή plainly has final (=purpose) sense (ParJer 5:2 ἐκάθισεν … τοῦ ἀναπαῆναι ὀλίγον; Soph., Lex. I 45f; B-D-F §400, 5 w. exx. fr. non-bibl. lit. and pap; Rob. 1067): ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων τοῦ σπείρειν a sower went out to sow Mt 13:3. ζητεῖν τοῦ ἀπολέσαι = ἵνα ἀπολέσῃ 2:13. τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν Lk 1:77. τοῦ κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας vs. 79. τοῦ σινιάσαι 22:31. τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν Ro 6:6. τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτά Gal 3:10. τοῦ γνῶναι αὐτόν Phil 3:10. Cp. Mt 3:13; 11:1; 24:45; Lk 2:24, 27; 8:5; 24:29; Ac 3:2; 20:30; 26:18; Hb 10:7 (Ps 39:9); 11:5; GJs 2:3f; 24:1.—The apparently solecistic τοῦ πολεμῆσαι Ro 12:7 bears a Semitic tinge, cp. Hos 9:13 et al. (Mussies 96).—The combination can also express
    ז. consecutive mng. (result): οὐδὲ μετεμελήθητε τοῦ πιστεῦσαι αὐτῷ you did not change your minds and believe him Mt 21:32. τοῦ μὴ εἶναι αὐτὴν μοιχαλίδα Ro 7:3. τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα Ac 7:19. Cp. 3:12; 10:25.
    ⓔ The art. is used w. prepositional expressions (Artem. 4, 33 p. 224, 7 ὁ ἐν Περγάμῳ; 4, 36 ὁ ἐν Μαγνησίᾳ; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010 recto, 8–12] οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις … οἱ ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσι καὶ μετεώροις; Tat. 31, 2 οἱ μὲν περὶ Κράτητα … οἱ δὲ περὶ Ἐρατοσθένη) τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς ἐν Κεγχρεαῖς Ro 16:1. ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις ταῖς ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ Rv 1:4. τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς ἐν (w. place name) ἐκκλησίας 2:1, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14 (on these pass. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 42–45). τοῖς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ to those in the house Mt 5:15. πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς 6:9. οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας Hb 13:24. οἱ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ Ro 8:1. οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας 2:8. οἱ ἐκ νόμου 4:14; cp. vs. 16. οἱ ἐκ τῆς Καίσαρος οἰκίας Phil 4:22. οἱ ἐξ εὐωνύμων Mt 25:41. τὸ θυσιαστήριον … τὸ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου Rv 8:3; cp. 9:13. On 1:4 s. ref in B-D-F §136, 1 to restoration by Nestle. οἱ παρʼ αὐτοῦ Mk 3:21. οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ Mt 12:3. οἱ περὶ αὐτόν Mk 4:10; Lk 22:49 al.—Neut. τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ πλοίου pieces of wreckage fr. the ship Ac 27:44 (difft. FZorell, BZ 9, 1911, 159f). τὰ περί τινος Lk 24:19, 27; Ac 24:10; Phil 1:27 (Tat. 32, 2 τὰ περὶ θεοῦ). τὰ περί τινα 2:23. τὰ κατʼ ἐμέ my circumstances Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. τὰ κατὰ τὸν νόμον what (was to be done) according to the law Lk 2:39. τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν Ro 12:18. τὰ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 15:17; Hb 2:17; 5:1 (X., Resp. Lac. 13, 11 ἱερεῖ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς θεούς, στρατηγῷ δὲ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους). τὰ παρʼ αὐτῶν Lk 10:7. τὸ ἐν ἐμοί the (child) in me GJs 12:2 al.
    ⓕ w. an adv. or adverbial expr. (1 Macc 8:3) τὸ ἔμπροσθεν Lk 19:4. τὸ ἔξωθεν Mt 23:25. τὸ πέραν Mt 8:18, 28. τὰ ἄνω J 8:23; Col 3:1f. τὰ κάτω J 8:23. τὰ ὀπίσω Mk 13:16. τὰ ὧδε matters here Col 4:9. ὁ πλησίον the neighbor Mt 5:43. οἱ καθεξῆς Ac 3:24. τὸ κατὰ σάρκα Ro 9:5. τὸ ἐκ μέρους 1 Cor 13:10.—Esp. w. indications of time τό, τὰ νῦν s. νῦν 2b. τὸ πάλιν 2 Cor 13:2. τὸ λοιπόν 1 Cor 7:29; Phil 3:1. τὸ πρῶτον J 10:40; 12:16; 19:39. τὸ πρότερον 6:62; Gal 4:13. τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν daily Lk 11:3.—τὸ πλεῖστον at the most 1 Cor 14:27.
    ⓖ The art. w. the gen. foll. denotes a relation of kinship, ownership, or dependence: Ἰάκωβος ὁ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου Mt 10:2 (Thu. 4, 104 Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου [sc. υἱός]; Plut., Timol. 3, 2; Appian, Syr. 26 §123 Σέλευκος ὁ Ἀντιόχου; Jos., Bell. 5, 5; 11). Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου Lk 24:10. ἡ τοῦ Οὐρίου the wife of Uriah Mt 1:6. οἱ Χλόης Chloë’s people 1 Cor 1:11. οἱ Ἀριστοβούλου, οἱ Ναρκίσσου Ro 16:10f. οἱ αὐτοῦ Ac 16:33. οἱ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Cor 15:23; Gal 5:24. Καισάρεια ἡ Φιλίππου Caesarea Philippi i.e. the city of Philip Mk 8:27.—τό, τά τινος someone’s things, affairs, circumstances (Thu. 4, 83 τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου; Parthenius 1, 6; Appian, Syr. 16 §67 τὰ Ῥωμαίων) τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, τῶν ἀνθρώπων Mt 16:23; 22:21; Mk 8:33; cp. 1 Cor 2:11. τὰ τῆς σαρκός, τοῦ πνεύματος Ro 8:5; cp. 14:19; 1 Cor 7:33f; 13:11. τὰ ὑμῶν 2 Cor 12:14. τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας μου 11:30. τὰ τοῦ νόμου what the law requires Ro 2:14. τὸ τῆς συκῆς what has been done to the fig tree Mt 21:21; cp. 8:33. τὰ ἑαυτῆς its own advantage 1 Cor 13:5; cp. Phil 2:4, 21. τὸ τῆς παροιμίας what the proverb says 2 Pt 2:22 (Pla., Theaet. 183e τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου; Menand., Dyscolus 633 τὸ τοῦ λόγου). ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house (so Field, Notes 50–56; Goodsp. Probs. 81–83; difft., ‘interests’, PTemple, CBQ 1, ’39, 342–52.—In contrast to the other synoptists, Luke does not elsewhere show Jesus ‘at home’.) Lk 2:49 (Lysias 12, 12 εἰς τὰ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ; Theocr. 2, 76 τὰ Λύκωνος; pap in Mayser II [1926] p. 8; POxy 523, 3 [II A.D.] an invitation to a dinner ἐν τοῖς Κλαυδίου Σαραπίωνος; PTebt 316 II, 23 [99 A.D.] ἐν τοῖς Ποτάμωνος; Esth 7:9; Job 18:19; Jos., Ant. 16, 302. Of the temple of a god Jos., C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός). Mt 20:15 is classified here by WHatch, ATR 26, ’44, 250–53; s. also ἐμός b.
    ⓗ The neut. of the art. stands
    α. before whole sentences or clauses (Epict. 4, 1, 45 τὸ Καίσαρος μὴ εἶναι φίλον; Prov. Aesopi 100 P. τὸ Οὐκ οἶδα; Jos., Ant. 10, 205; Just., D. 33, 2 τὸ γὰρ … [Ps 109:4]) τὸ Οὐ φονεύσεις, οὐ μοιχεύσεις κτλ. (quot. fr. the Decalogue) Mt 19:18; Ro 13:9. τὸ Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη (quot. fr. Is 53:12) Lk 22:37. Cp. Gal 5:14. τὸ Εἰ δύνῃ as far as your words ‘If you can’ are concerned Mk 9:23. Likew. before indirect questions (Vett. Val. 291, 14 τὸ πῶς τέτακται; Ael. Aristid. 45, 15 K. τὸ ὅστις ἐστίν; ParJer 6:15 τὸ πῶς ἀποστείλης; GrBar 8:6 τὸ πῶς ἐταπεινώθη; Jos., Ant. 20, 28 ἐπὶ πείρᾳ τοῦ τί φρονοῖεν; Pel.-Leg. p. 20, 32 τὸ τί γένηται; Mel., Fgm. 8, 2 [Goodsp. p. 311] τὸ δὲ πῶς λούονται) τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό Lk 1:62. τὸ τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν 9:46. τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν 1 Th 4:1. Cp. Lk 19:48; 22:2, 4, 23f; Ac 4:21; 22:30; Ro 8:26; Hs 8, 1, 4.
    β. before single words which are taken fr. what precedes and hence are quoted, as it were (Epict. 1, 29, 16 τὸ Σωκράτης; 3, 23, 24; Hierocles 13 p. 448 ἐν τῷ μηδείς) τὸ ‘ἀνέβη’ Eph 4:9. τὸ ‘ἔτι ἅπαξ’ Hb 12:27. τὸ ‘Ἁγάρ’ Gal 4:25.
    ⓘ Other notable uses of the art. are
    α. the elliptic use, which leaves a part of a sentence accompanied by the art. to be completed fr. the context: ὁ τὰ δύο the man with the two (talents), i.e. ὁ τὰ δύο τάλαντα λαβών Mt 25:17; cp. vs. 22. τῷ τὸν φόρον Ro 13:7. ὁ τὸ πολύ, ὀλίγον the man who had much, little 2 Cor 8:15 after Ex 16:18 (cp. Lucian, Bis Accus. 9 ὁ τὴν σύριγγα [sc. ἔχων]; Arrian, Anab. 7, 8, 3 τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ [sc. ὁδόν]).
    β. Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9; s. καί 2h.
    γ. the fem. art. is found in a quite singular usage ἡ οὐαί (ἡ θλῖψις or ἡ πληγή) Rv 9:12; 11:14. Sim. ὁ Ἀμήν 3:14 (here the masc. art. is evidently chosen because of the alternate name for Jesus).
    ⓙ One art. can refer to several nouns connected by καί
    α. when various words, sing. or pl., are brought close together by a common art.: τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ γραμματεῖς Mt 2:4; cp. 16:21; Mk 15:1. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις κ. ψαλμοῖς Lk 24:44. τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ καὶ Σαμαρείᾳ Ac 1:8; cp. 8:1; Lk 5:17 al.—Even nouns of different gender can be united in this way (Aristoph., Eccl. 750; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 12 p. 37a οἱ δύο θεοί, of Apollo and Artemis; Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. c. 292; PTebt 14, 10 [114 B.C.]; En 18:14; EpArist 109) κατὰ τὰ ἐντάλματα καὶ διδασκαλίας Col 2:22. Cp. Lk 1:6. εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς καὶ φραγμούς 14:23.
    β. when one and the same person has more than one attribute applied to him: πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου καὶ πατέρα ὑμῶν J 20:17. ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Ro 15:6; 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; 1 Pt 1:3. ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ (ἡμῶν) Eph 5:20; Phil 4:20; 1 Th 1:3; 3:11, 13. Of Christ: τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ σωτῆρος 2 Pt 1:11; cp. 2:20; 3:18. τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν Tit 2:13 (PGrenf II, 15 I, 6 [139 B.C.] of the deified King Ptolemy τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ εὐεργέτου καὶ σωτῆρος [ἐπιφανοῦς] εὐχαρίστου).
    γ. On the other hand, the art. is repeated when two different persons are named: ὁ φυτεύων καὶ ὁ ποτίζων 1 Cor 3:8. ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμών Ac 26:30.
    ⓚ In a fixed expression, when a noun in the gen. is dependent on another noun, the art. customarily appears twice or not at all: τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 3:16; πνεῦμα θεοῦ Ro 8:9. ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Cor 2:17; λόγος θεοῦ 1 Th 2:13. ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ κυρίου 2 Th 2:2; ἡμ. κ. 1 Th 5:2. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου Mt 8:20; υἱ. ἀ. Hb 2:6. ἡ ἀνάστασις τῶν νεκρῶν Mt 22:31; ἀ. ν. Ac 23:6. ἡ κοιλία τῆς μητρός J 3:4; κ. μ. Mt 19:12.—APerry, JBL 68, ’49, 329–34; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 93–95.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὁ

  • 33 ὥρα

    ὥρα, ας, ἡ (Hom. [ὥρη]+; ins, pap, LXX; PsSol 18:10; TestSol, TestAbr, TestJob, Test12Patr, JosAs, ParJer, GrBar; ApcEsdr 3:4 p. 27, 9 Tdf.; ApcSed, ApcMos, EpArist, Philo, Joseph.; Ar. 15:10; Just.; Tat. 20, 2).
    ① an undefined period of time in a day, time of day ὀψὲ ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας since it was already late in the day or since the hour was (already) late Mk 11:11 v.l.; cp. MPol 7:1b (s. ὀψέ 1 and 2; Demosth. 21, 84; Polyb. 3, 83, 7 ὀψὲ τῆς ὥρας). ὀψίας οὔσης τῆς ὥρας Mk 11:11 (ὄψιος 1). ὥρα πολλή late hour (Polyb. 5, 8, 3; Dionys. Hal. 2, 54; TestAbr A 14 p. 94, 24 [Stone p. 36]; Jos., Ant. 8, 118) 6:35ab. ἡ ὥρα ἤδη παρῆλθεν Mt 14:15 (παρέρχομαι 2).—Mt 24:42 v.l., 44; Lk 12:39, 40; Rv 3:3; D 16:1. W. ἡμέρα day and time of day, hour (ApcEsdr 3:4 p. 27, 9 Tdf.) Mt 24:36, 50; 25:13; Mk 13:32; Lk 12:46.
    ② a period of time as division of a day, hour
    ⓐ beside year, month, and day Rv 9:15; the twelfth part of a day (=period of daylight) οὐχὶ δώδεκα ὧραί εἰσιν τῆς ἡμέρας; J 11:9 (TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 24 [Stone p. 70]). μίαν ὥραν ἐποίησαν Mt 20:12 (s. ποιέω 6); cp. Lk 22:59; Ac 5:7; 19:34 (ἐπὶ ὥρας δύο CBurchard, ZNW 61, ’70, 167f; TestBenj 3:7, Judah 3, 4); MPol 7:3. συνεψήφισα τὰς ὥρας I counted the hours Hv 3, 1, 4. One ὥρα in this world corresponds to a ὥρα thirty days in length in the place of punishment Hs 6, 4, 4. μίαν ὥραν (not even) one hour Mt 26:40; Mk 14:37. Such passages help us to understand how ὥρα can acquire the sense
    ⓑ a short period of time μιᾷ ὥρᾳ (cp. TestJob 7:12; ApcMos 25 [both ἐν]) in a single hour=in an extraordinarily short time Rv 18:10, 17, 19. μίαν ὥραν for a very short time 17:12. Likew. πρὸς ὥραν for a while, for a moment J 5:35; 2 Cor 7:8; Gal 2:5 (s. on this pass. KLake, Gal 2:3–5: Exp. 7th ser., 1, 1906, 236–45; CWatkins, Der Kampf des Pls um Galatien 1913; BBacon, JBL 42, 1923, 69–80); Phlm 15; MPol 11:2. πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας 1 Th 2:17.
    ⓒ as a temporal indicator, reckoned from the beginning of the day (6 hours or 6 A.M., our time) or the night (18 hours or 6 P.M.) (Plut. et al.; Appian, Mithrid. 19 §72 ἑβδόμης ὥρας=at the 7th hour or 1 P.M.; SIG 671A, 9 [162/160 B.C.] ὥρας δευτέρας; 736, 109 [92 B.C.] ἀπὸ τετάρτας ὥρας ἕως ἑβδόμας; Jos., Vi. 279 ἕκτη ὥ.; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 1 II, 21 [246 B.C.] περὶ ὀγδόην ὥραν; PTebt 15, 2 [II B.C.]; Sb 5252, 20 [I A.D.] ἀφʼ ὥρας ὀγδόης; EpArist 303 μέχρι μὲν ὥρας ἐνάτης) ἕως ὥρας δευτέρας until the second hour (=8 A.M.) Hs 9, 11, 7. ὥρα τρίτη nine o’clock (A.M.) Mk 15:25 (Goodsp., Probs. 68f); Ac 2:15 (τῆς ἡμέρας); περὶ τρίτην ὥραν about nine o’clock (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 45 §182 περὶ τρίτην ὥραν ἡμέρας) Mt 20:3; ἀπὸ τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νύκτος by nine o’clock at night (= 21 hours, or simply tonight) Ac 23:23 (TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 11 [Stone p. 12] περὶ ὥραν τρίτην τῆς νυκτός; cp. ibid. B 6 p. 109, 27 [St. p. 66]; Jos., Bell. 6, 68; 79 ἀπὸ ἐνάτης ὥ. τῆς νυκτὸς εἰς ἑβδόμην τῆς ἡμέρας). ἀπὸ ὥρας ε´ (=πέμπτης) ἕως δεκάτης from eleven o’clock in the morning until four in the afternoon (= 16 hours) Ac 19:9 v.l. περὶ ὥραν πέμπτην (PTebt 15, 2 [114 B.C.]; POxy 1114, 24 περὶ ὥ. τρίτην) at eleven o’clock (A.M.) Hv 3, 1, 2. ὥρα ἕκτη twelve o’clock noon Mt 20:5; 27:45a; Mk 15:33a; Lk 23:44a; J 4:6 (ὥρα ὡς ἕκτη about noon; TestJos 8:1 ὥρα ὡσεὶ ἕκτη; ParJer 1:11 ἕκτην ὥραν τῆς νυκτός); 19:14 (ὥρα ὡς ἕκτη); Ac 10:9. ἐχθὲς ὥραν ἑβδόμην yesterday at one o’clock in the afternoon (= 13 hours) J 4:52b (on the use of the acc. to express a point of time s. Hdb. ad loc.; Soph., Lex. I 44; B-D-F §161, 3; Rob. 470). ὥρᾳ ὀγδόῃ at two o’clock in the afternoon (= 14 hours) MPol 21. ὥρα ἐνάτη three in the afternoon (= 15 hours) Mt 20:5; 27:45f; Mk 15:33b, 34; Lk 23:44b; Ac 3:1 (ἐπὶ τὴν ὥραν τῆς προσευχῆς τὴν ἐνάτην); 10:3 (ὡσεὶ περὶ ὥ. ἐνάτην τῆς ἡμέρας); ὥρας θ´ AcPl Ha 11, 3; περὶ ὥραν ἐνάτην GJs 2:4; GPt 6:22 (TestAbr B 12 p. 117, 2 [Stone p. 82] κατὰ τὴν ἐνάτην ὥραν). ὥρα ὡς δεκάτη about four in the afternoon (= 16 hours) J 1:39. ἑνδεκάτη ὥρα five o’clock in the afternoon (= 17 hours) Mt 20:(6, without ὥρα), 9. ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος four days ago, reckoned from (=at) this very hour, I was praying at three o’clock in the afternoon (= 15 hours) Ac 10:30 (echoing vs. 3, but inelegantly phrased; s. comm. on the textual problems). ἐπύθετο τὴν ὥραν ἐν ᾗ … he inquired at what time … J 4:52a; cp. vs. 53 (cp. Ael. Arist. 50, 56 K.=26 p. 519 D.: … τὴν ὥραν αἰσθάνομαι … ἐκείνην, ἐν ᾗ … ; 47, 56 K.=23 p. 459 D.: ἀφυπνιζόμην κ. εὗρον ἐκείνην τὴν ὥραν οὖσαν, ᾗπερ …). ᾗ ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ὥρᾳ ἐμαρτύρησεν ὁ Πολύκαρπος the very day and hour that … EpilMosq 4.—Less definite are the indications of time in such expressions as ἄχρι τῆς ἄρτι ὥρας up to the present moment 1 Cor 4:11. πᾶσαν ὥραν hour after hour, every hour, constantly (Ex 18:22; Lev 16:2; JosAs 15:7; Ar. [Milne 76, 34]; cp. TestJob 10:1 πάσας ὥρας) 15:30. Also καθʼ ὥραν (Strabo 15, 1, 55; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 69) 2 Cl 12:1. αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ at that very time, at once, instantly (oft. pap, e.g. POxy 235, 7 [I A.D.]; Da 3:6, 15; TestAbr B 12 p. 116, 27 [Stone p. 80]; GrBar 14:1; 15:1; ApcMos 20) Lk 2:38; 24:33; Ac 16:18; 22:13.
    ③ a point of time as an occasion for an event, time (BGU 1816, 12 [I B.C.] πρὸ ὥρας=before the right time) ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ Mt 8:13; 10:19; 18:1 (v.l. ἡμέρᾳ); 26:55; Mk 13:11; Lk 7:21; Ac 16:33; Rv 11:13; MPol 7:2a; GJs 20:2 (only pap). Likew. ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ Lk 10:21; 12:12; 13:31; 20:19 (on both expressions s. JJeremias, ZNW 42, ’49, 214–17). ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης from that time on, at once Mt 9:22; 15:28; 17:18; J 19:27. ὥρα ἐν ᾗ J 5:28. ὥρα ὅτε 4:21, 23; 5:25; 16:25 (cp. ApcMos 17 περὶ ὥραν ὅταν). ὥρα ἵνα 16:2, 32. W. gen. of thing, the time for which has come (Diod S 13, 94, 1; Ael. Aristid. 51, 1 K.=27 p. 534 D.; PGM 1, 221 ἀνάγκης; JosAs 3:3 μεσημβρίας … καὶ ἀρίστου; ApcMos 42 [of Eve’s request] ἐν τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς τελευτῆς αὐτῆς; Jos., Ant. 7, 326 ὥ. ἀρίστου; SibOr 4, 56) ἡ ὥρα τοῦ θυμιάματος Lk 1:10; τοῦ δείπνου 14:17, cp. MPol 7:1a; τοῦ πειρασμοῦ Rv 3:10; τῆς κρίσεως 14:7; τῆς δοξολογίας αὐτοῦ GJs 13:1; τοῦ ἀσπασμοῦ 24:1; ἡ ὥρα αὐτῶν the time for them J 16:4; w. the gen. (of the Passover) to be supplied Lk 22:14. Also w. inf. (Hom. et al.; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 20, 1; Aelian, VH 1, 21) ἡ ὥρα θερίσαι the time to reap Rv 14:15 (cp. Theopomp. [IV B.C.]: 115 Fgm. 31 Jac. θερινὴ ὥ.; Paus. 2, 35, 4 ὥ. θέρους). Also acc. w. inf. (Gen 29:7) ὥρα (ἐστιν) ὑμᾶς ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι Ro 13:11.—W. gen. of pers. the time of or for someone to do or to suffer someth. (cp. Philo, Leg. ad Gai. 168 σὸς νῦν ὁ καιρός ἐστιν, ἐπέγειρε σαυτόν) of a woman who is to give birth (cp. GrBar 3:5 ἐν τῇ ὥρᾳ τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν) ἡ ὥρα αὐτῆς J 16:21 (v.l. ἡμέρα, s. ἡμέρα 3, beg.).—Lk 22:53. Esp. of Jesus, of whose ὥρα J speaks, as the time of his death (Diod S 15, 87, 6: the dying Epaminondas says ὥρα ἐστὶ τελευτᾶν. Cp. MPol 8:1 τοῦ ἐξιέναι) and of the glorification which is inextricably bound up w. it ἡ ὥρα αὐτοῦ J 7:30; 8:20; 13:1 (foll. by ἵνα); cp. ἡ ὥρα μου 2:4 (s. Hdb. ad loc.). ἡ ὥρα ἵνα δοξασθῇ 12:23. ἡ ὥρα αὕτη 12:27ab. Also abs. ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα 17:1 (AGeorge, ‘L’heure’ de J 17, RB 61, ’54, 392–97); cp. Mt 26:45; Mk 14:35, 41.—ἐσχάτη ὥρα the last hour in the present age of the world’s existence 1J 2:18ab.—CCowling, Mark’s Use of ὥρα, Australian Biblical Review 5, ’56, 153–60. EBickermann, Chronology of the Ancient World 2 ’80, 13–16.—B. 954 and esp. 1001. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὥρα

  • 34 αὐτός

    αὐτός, ή, ὁ (Hom.+; W-S. §22; B-D-F index) reflexive pron. ‘self’
    ① intensive marker, setting an item off fr. everything else through emphasis and contrast, self, used in all pers., genders, and numbers.
    ⓐ used w. a subject (noun or pron.)
    α. specif. named (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 6; Plut., Caes. 710 [7, 9] αὐ. Κικέρων; 2 Macc 11:12) αὐ. Δαυίδ David himself Mk 12:36f; Lk 20:42; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς Lk 24:15; J 2:24; 4:44; αὐ. ὁ Ἰησοῦς short ending of Mk.
    β. or otherw. exactly designated αὐ. ὁ θεός (Jos., Bell. 7, 346) Rv 21:3; αὐ. τ. ἐπουράνια Hb 9:23 (cp. 4 Macc 17:17; Sir 46:3b; GrBar); αὐ. ἐγώ I myself Ro 15:14 (cp. 3 Macc 3:13; POxy 294, 13f [22 A.D.]); αὐ. ἐγὼ Παῦλος 2 Cor 10:1; αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς J 3:28 (cp. 4 Macc 6:19; En 103:7); αὐτοὶ οὗτοι (Thu. 6, 33, 6) Ac 24:15; ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς among yourselves 1 Cor 11:13.
    ⓑ to emphasize a subject already known: of Jesus Mt 8:24; Mk 8:29; Lk 5:16f; 9:51; 10:38; 24:36 (cp. the Pythagorean αὐτὸς ἔφα Schwyzer II 211). Of God Hb 13:5 (cp. Wsd 6:7; 7:17; Sir 15:12; 1 Macc 3:22 and oft. LXX).
    ⓒ differentiating fr. other subjects or pointing out a contrast w. them αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ Mk 2:25; J 2:12; 4:53; 18:1; Lk 24:15; 1 Cor 3:15. αὐ. οὐκ εἰσήλθατε καὶ τοὺς εἰσερχομένους ἐκωλύσατε you yourselves did not come in etc. Lk 11:52; cp. vs. 46.—J 7:9; 9:21; Mt 23:4; Lk 6:11; Ac 18:15; 1 Th 1:9; 1 Cor 2:15. αὐτὸς ἐγώ I alone 2 Cor 12:13. Ro 7:25 s. e below.—εἰ μὴ αὐ. except himself Rv 19:12. αὐ. ὄγδοός ἐστιν he is the eighth 17:11; s. also 2a. In anticipation of an incorrect inference Ἰησοῦς αὐ. οὐκ ἐβάπτιζεν Jesus did not personally baptize J 4:2 opp. ‘his disciples.’ Of bodily presence, αὐ. παραγενοῦ come in person (as opp. to letter-writing) AcPlCor 1:7; with component of surprise that the subject specified is actually present in person (Philo, De Jos. 238: Jos. to his brothers αὐ. εἰμι ἐγώ) Lk 24:36, 39.
    ⓓ of one whose action is independent or significant without ref. to someth. else (Hyperid. 1, 19, 11; 3, 2) without help J 2:25; 4:42; 6:6; Ac 20:34; αὐ. ᾠκοδόμησεν he built at his own expense Lk 7:5; αὐ. ὁ πατὴρ φιλεῖ ὑμᾶς the Father personally loves you J 16:27 (i.e. they require no intermediary).
    ⓔ of one viewed as a solitary figure ‘(be) by oneself, alone’ w. μόνος (cp. μόνος 1aβ) Mk 6:47; J 6:15. W. κατʼ ἰδιαν Mk 6:31.—thrown on one’s own resources αὐ. ἐγὼ τῷ νοὶ̈ δουλεύω νόμῳ θεοῦ thrown on my own resources I am enslaved in mind to God’s interests but in my flesh to the interests of sin Ro 7:25 (JWeiss, Beitr. zur Paulin. Rhetorik, in BWeiss Festschr., 1897, 233f; JKürzinger, BZ 7, ’63, 270–74).
    ⓕ with climactic force in connection with one or more lexical units καὶ αὐτός even (Sir prol. line 24 καὶ αὐ. ὁ νόμος even the law; 4 Macc 17:1; GrBar 4:13; 9:4 al.) καὶ αὐ. ἡ κτίσις even the created world Ro 8:21. καὶ αὐ. Σάρρα even Sara Hb 11:11 (on the rdg. here s. Windisch ad loc. and B-D-F §194, 1; Rob. 686; Mlt-Turner 220; cp. Ps.-Callisth. 1, 10, 3 καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν Φίλιππον=and even Philip; but the text of the Hb passage is prob. corrupt; s. καταβολή). οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐ. διδάσκει; does not even nature teach? 1 Cor 11:14.—Without ascensive particle, Ro 9:3 Paul expresses extraordinary devotion to his people (imagine!) I myself.
    ⓖ w. attention directed to a certain pers. or thing to the exclusion of other lexical units, so that αὐ. can almost take on demonstrative sense (s. 2a, also Aeschyl., 7 against Thebes 528; Hes., Works 350): αὐ. τὰ ἔργα the very deeds J 5:36; αὐ. ὁ Ἰωάννης (POxy 745, 3 [I A.D.] αὐ. τὸν Ἀντᾶν) this very (or same) John Mt 3:4 (s. Mlt. 91); αὐτῆς τῆς Ἡρωδίαδος Mk 6:22 v.l. (s. 2bα for the rdg. αὐτοῦ W-H., N. and s. on this RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 25f); ἐν αὐ. τ. καιρῷ (cp. Tob 3:17 BA; 2:9; SIG 1173, 1 αὐταῖς τ. ἡμέραις) just at that time Lk 13:1.—23:12; 24:13.—2:38; 10:21; 12:12.—10:7. αὐτὸ τοῦτο just this, the very same thing (Oenomaus in Eus., PE 5, 22, 3; PRyl 77, 39; POxy 1119, 11; cp. Phoenix Coloph. 6, 8 Coll. Alex. p. 235) 2 Cor 7:11; Gal 2:10; Phil 1:6; εἰς αὐ. τοῦτο Ro 9:17; 13:6; 2 Cor 5:5; Eph 6:22; Col 4:8. The phrases τοῦτο αὐ. 2 Cor 2:3 and αὐ. τοῦτο 2 Pt 1:5 are adverbial accusatives for this very reason (Pla., Prot. 310e [pl.]; X., An. 1, 9, 21; PGrenf I, 1, 14).
    ② a ref. to a definite person or thing, he, him, she, her, it, they, them
    ⓐ αὐτός refers w. more or less emphasis, esp. in the nom., to a subject, oft. resuming one already mentioned: αὐ. παρακληθήσονται they (not others) shall be comforted Mt 5:4; cp. vs. 5ff. οὐκ αὐ. βλασφημοῦσιν; Js 2:7. αὐ. σώσει Mt 1:21 (cp. Ps 129:8). αὐ. ἀποδώσει 6:4 v.l.—Mk 1:8; 14:15 al. Freq. the emphasis is scarcely felt: Mt 14:2; Lk 4:15; 22:23; J 6:24; Ac 22:19 (cp. Gen 12:12; Tob 6:11 BA; Sir 49:7; Vett. Val. 113, 16.—JWackernagel, Syntax II2 1928, 86).—Perh. the development of αὐ. in the direction of οὗτος (which it practically replaces in Mod. Gk.) is beginning to have some influence in the NT (Pla., Phdr. 229e αὐτά=this; X., An. 4, 7, 7 αὐτό; Dio Chrys. 3, 37; 15 [32], 10 αὐτοί; Aelian, NA 6, 10; Mél. de la fac. orient … Beyrouth 1, 1906, 149 no. 18 εἰς αὐτὸ ἐγεννήθης=for this [purpose] you were born; Schmid IV 69; 616 αὐτός = οὗτος; Synes., Ep. 3, 159a; 4, 165a; Agathias [VI A.D.], Hist. 1, 3 p. 144, 17 D.) καὶ αὐ. ἦν Σαμαρίτης Lk 17:16 (cp. 3:23; 19:2 and 1g above; on 5:1 s. Mussies 169). Yet here αὐ. could mean alone (examples of this from Hom. on in many writers in WSchulze, Quaestiones epicae 1892, p. 250, 3) he alone was a Samaritan; but Luke’s thematic interest in unexpected candidates for the Kingdom (cp. 5:30–32; 15:2; 19:2 [καὶ αὐτός]; 23:43) militates against the view.
    ⓑ The oblique cases of αὐ. very oft. (in a fashion customary since Hom.) take the place of the 3rd pers. personal pron.; in partic. the gen. case replaces the missing possessive pron.
    α. w. ref. to a preceding noun διαφέρετε αὐτῶν Mt 6:26; καταβάντος αὐτοῦ 8:1; ἀπεκάλυψας αὐτά 11:25.—26:43f; Mk 1:10; 4:33ff; 12:19; Lk 1:22; 4:41. The gen. is sometimes put first for no special reason (Esth 1:1e) αὐτοῦ τὰ σημεῖα J 2:23, cp. 3:19, 21, 33; 4:47; 12:40. αὐτῶν τὴν συνείδησιν 1 Cor 8:12. Sim. Lk 1:36 αὐτῇ τῇ καλουμένῃ στείρᾳ w. her who was called barren. Forms of αὐ. are sometimes used without qualifiers in a series, referring to difft. pers.: φέρουσιν αὐτῷ (Jesus) τυφλόν, καὶ παρακαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν (Jesus) ἵνα αὐτοῦ (i.e. τοῦ τυφλοῦ) ἅψηται Mk 8:22. On problems related to the rdg. τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρωδιάδος εἰσελθούσης when his (Herod’s) daughter Herodias came in (?) Mk 6:22, s. Borger in 1g, and entry Ἡρῳδίας.
    β. w. ref. to a noun to be supplied fr. the context, and without suggestion of contrast or disparagement: ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν (i.e. τ. Γαλιλαίων) Mt 4:23. ἐν ταῖς πόλεσιν αὐτῶν 11:1. ἐκήρυσσεν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the inhabitants) Ac 8:5. παρακαλέσας αὐτούς 20:2. ἀποταξάμενος αὐτοῖς 2 Cor 2:13. τὰ γινόμενα ὑπʼ αὐτῶν Eph 5:12. ἐδημηγόρει πρὸς αὐτούς Ac 12:21. τὸν φόβον αὐτῶν 1 Pt 3:14 (cp. 13 and s. Is 8:12). Mt 12:9 (cp. vs. 2); Lk 2:22; 18:15; 19:9; 23:51; J 8:44; 20:15; Ac 4:5; Ro 2:26; Hb 8:9.
    γ. freq. used w. a verb, even though a noun in the case belonging to the verb has already preceded it (cp. Dio Chrys. 6, 23; 78 [29], 20; Epict. 3, 1, 22; POxy 299 [I A.D.] Λάμπωνι ἔδωκα αὐτῷ δραχμὰς η´; FKälker, Quaest. de Eloc. Polyb. 1880, 274) τοῖς καθημένοις ἐν σκιᾷ θανάτου φῶς ἀνέτειλεν αὐτοῖς Mt 4:16.—5:40; 9:28; 26:71; J 15:2; 18:11; Js 4:17; Rv 2:7, 17; 6:4 al.
    δ. used pleonastically after a relative, as somet. in older Gk., e.g. Soph., X., Hyperid. (B-D-F §297; Rob. 683), freq. in the LXX fr. Gen 1:11 (οὗ τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ; GrBar 2:11 ὸ̔ν οὐδεὶς δύναται πειρᾶσαι αὐτόν al.) on (Helbing, Grammatik p. iv; Thackeray 46), and quotable elsewh. in the Koine (Callim., Epigr. 43 [42], 3 ὧν … αὐτῶν; Peripl. Eryth. c. 35; POxy 117, 15f ἐξ ὧν δώσεις τοῖς παιδίοις σου ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν): οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ Mt 3:12; Lk 3:17. οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς … τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ Mk 1:7; Lk 3:16. ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς Mk 7:25. πᾶν ὸ̔ δέδωκεν … ἀναστήσω αὐτό J 6:39; Ac 15:17. ἣν οὐδεὶς δύναται κλεῖσαι αὐτήν Rv 3:8. οἷς ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς 7:2, cp. 13:12. οὗ ἡ πνοὴ αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 21:9.—Cp. in ref. to an anticipatory noun τὰ Ἐλισαίου ὀστᾶ … νεκροῦ βληθέντος … ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast on the bones of Elisha AcPlCor 2:32.
    ε. continuing a relative clause (an older Gk. constr.; B-D-F §297; Rob. 724): ἐξ οὗ τὰ πάντα καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς αὐτόν 1 Cor 8:6; οἷς τὸ κρίμα … καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν (for καὶ ὧν ἡ ἀπώλεια) 2 Pt 2:3.
    ζ. w. a change of pers. Lk 1:45; Rv 18:24.
    η. w. a change of number and gender ἔθνη … αὐτούς Mt 28:19. τοῦ παιδίου … αὐτῇ Mk 5:41. φῶς … αὐτόν J 1:10. λαόν … αὐτῶν Mt 1:21.—14:14; Mk 6:45f; 2 Cor 5:19.
    ③ pert. to someth. that is identical with, or closely related to, someth., w. art. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό the same (Hom. et al.; Ps 101:28, s. Mussies 171).
    ⓐ w. a noun τὸν αὐ. λόγον Mt 26:44; Mk 14:39; τὸ αὐ. φύραμα Ro 9:21; cp. Lk 23:40; 1 Cor 1:10; 10:3f; 12:4ff; 15:39; Phil 1:30.
    ⓑ without a noun τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. ποιεῖν (Jos., Ant. 5, 129; 9, 271) Mt 5:46; Lk 6:33; Eph 6:9. τὰ αὐτὰ πράσσειν Ro 2:1. τὸ αὐ. λέγειν agree (not only in words; s. on λέγω 1aα) 1 Cor 1:10. ἀπαγγέλλειν τὰ αὐτά Ac 15:27. τὸ αὐ. as adv. in the same way (X., Mem. 3, 8, 5) Mt 27:44; 18:9 D.—ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ. (Hesychius: ὁμοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν αὐ. τόπον; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 30, 167; SIG 736, 66 [92 B.C.]; BGU 762, 9 [II A.D.] ἀπὸ τῶν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ. καμήλων ε´ of the five camels taken together; PTebt 14, 20; 319, 9 al.; 2 Km 2:13; Ps 2:2 al.; 3 Macc 3:1; Sus 14 Theod.) of place at the same place, together (En 100:2; Jos., Bell. 2, 346; s. συνέρχομαι 1a) Mt 22:34; 1 Cor 11:20; 14:23; B 4:10; IEph 5:3; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ. (TestNapht 6:6) Lk 17:35; Ac 1:15; 2:1. προστιθέναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ. add to the total Ac 2:47 (see M-M.). κατὰ τὸ αυ. of pers. being together as a body in each other’s company, together (PEleph 1, 5 εἶναι δὲ ἡμᾶς κατὰ ταὐτό) and also with ref. to simultaneous presence at the same time (Aelian, VH 14, 8 δύο εἰκόνας εἰργάσατο Πολύκλειτος κατὰ τ. αὐ.; 3 Km 3:18) Ac 14:1; the mng. in the same way may also apply (ENestle, Acts 14:1: ET 24, 1913, 187f) as in Hs 8, 7, 1 (cod. A; s. καθά; but s. Bonner 105, n. 17, who restores κατʼ αὐ[τοὺς αἱ ῥάβ]δοι; so also Joly).—In combinations ἓν καὶ τὸ αὐ. (also Pla., Leg. 721c; Aristot., Metaph. 1039a, 28; other exx. in GKypke, Observ. II 1755, 220; Diod S 3, 63, 2 εἷς καὶ ὁ αὐτός) one and the same thing 1 Cor 11:5; cp. 12:11 (Diod S 22, 6, 3 μίαν καὶ τὴν αὐτὴν ἀπόκρισιν; Epict. 1, 19, 15 μία καὶ ἡ αὐ. ἀρχή). W. gen. foll. τὰ αὐ. τῶν παθημάτων the same sufferings as 1 Pt 5:9. Without comparison: ὁ αὐ. (Thu. 2, 61, 2; Plut., Caesar 729 [45, 7], Brutus 989 [13, 1]) εἶ thou art the same Hb 1:12 (Ps 101:28); cp. 13:8. On the variation betw. αὐτοῦ and αὑτοῦ, αὐτῶν and αὑτῶν in the mss., s. ἑαυτοῦ, beg.—WMichaelis, D. unbetonte καὶ αὐτός bei Lukas: StTh 4, ’51, 86–93; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 96–100; MWilcox, The Semitisms of Ac, ’65, 93–100 (Qumran).—Mussies 168–73. DELG. M-M. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > αὐτός

  • 35 τύπος

    τύπος, ου, ὁ (Aeschyl., Hdt.+; ins in var. senses: New Docs 4, 41f; loanw. in rabb.).
    ① a mark made as the result of a blow or pressure, mark, trace (Posidon.: 169 Fgm. 1 Jac.; Anth. Pal. 6, 57, 5 ὀδόντων; Athen. 13, 49, 585c τῶν πληγῶν; Diog. L. 7, 45; 50 of a seal-ring; ViJer 13 [p. 73, 10 Sch.]; Philo, Mos. 1, 119; Jos., Bell. 3, 420; PGM 4, 1429; 5, 307.—ὁ ἐκ τῆς αἰσθήσεως τ. ἐν διανοίᾳ γινόμενος Did., Gen. 217, 19) τῶν ἥλων J 20:25ab (v.l. τὸν τόπον).—This may be the place for οἱ τύποι τῶν λίθων Hs 9, 10, 1f (taking a stone out of the ground leaves a hole that bears the contours of the stone, but in effect the stone has made the impression; s. KLake, Apost. Fathers II, 1917; MDibelius, Hdb. But s. 4 below).
    ② embodiment of characteristics or function of a model, copy, image (cp. Artem. 2, 85 the children are τύπ. of their parents.—Cp. ὁ γὰρ ἥλιος ἐν τύπῳ θεοῦ ἐστιν Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 8]) the master is a τύπος θεοῦ image of God to the slave B 19:7; D 4:11. The supervisor/bishop is τύπος τοῦ πατρός ITr 3:1; cp. IMg 6:1ab (in both instances here, τύπον is Zahn’s conjecture, favored by Lghtf., for τόπον, which is unanimously read by Gk. and Lat. mss., and which can be retained, with Funk, Hilgenfeld, Krüger, Bihlmeyer).
    ③ an object formed to resemble some entity, image, statue of any kind of material (Hdt. 3, 88,3 τύπ. λίθινος. Of images of the gods Herodian 5, 5, 6; Jos., Ant. 1, 311 τ. τύπους τῶν θεῶν; 15, 329; SibOr 3, 14) Ac 7:43 (Am 5:26).
    ④ a kind, class, or thing that suggests a model or pattern, form, figure, pattern (Aeschyl. et al.; Pla., Rep. 387c; 397c) ἐποίησεν ἡμᾶς ἄλλον τύπον he has made us people of a different stamp B 6:11. τύπος διδαχῆς pattern of teaching Ro 6:17 (cp. διδαχή 2; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 23, 105 τὸν τύπον τῆς διδασκαλίας.—The use of τύπος for the imperial ‘rescripts’ [e.g. OGI 521, 5; s. note 4, esp. the reff. for θεῖος τύπος] appears too late to merit serious consideration.—JKürzinger, Biblica 39, ’58, 156–76; ELee, NTS 8, ’61/62, 166–73 [‘mold’]). Of the form (of expression) (Dionys. Hal., Ad Pomp. 4, 2 Rad.; PLips 121, 28 [II A.D.]; POxy 1460, 12) γράψας ἐπιστολὴν ἔχουσαν τὸν τύπον τοῦτον (cp. EpArist 34 ἐπιστολὴ τὸν τύπον ἔχουσα τοῦτον) somewhat as follows, after this manner, to this effect (so numerous versions) Ac 23:25, but s. next.—On τοὺς τύπους τῶν λίθων ἀναπληροῦν Hs 9, 10, 1 s. ἀναπληρόω 3 and 1 above.
    ⑤ the content of a document, text, content (Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 35, 259 τύπος τ. γεγραμμένων; 3 Macc 3:30; PFlor 278 II, 20 [III A.D.] τῷ αὐτῷ τύπῳ κ. χρόνῳ=of the same content and date) Ac 23:25 (EpArist 34 ἐπιστολὴ τὸν τύπον ἔχουσα τοῦτον). Cp. POxy 3366, 28 (of a copy of a letter), 32 (the original). S. New Docs 1, 77f (with caution against confusing rhetorical practice in composition of speeches and the inclusion of letters whose value lay in their verbatim expression). For a difft. view s. 4 above; more ambivalently Hemer, Acts 347f.
    ⑥ an archetype serving as a model, type, pattern, model (Pla., Rep. 379a περὶ θεολογίας)
    ⓐ technically design, pattern (Diod S 14, 41, 4) Ac 7:44; Hb 8:5 (cp. on both Ex 25:40).
    ⓑ in the moral life example, pattern (OGI 383, 212 [I B.C.] τ. εὐσεβείας; SibOr 1, 380; Did., Gen. 125, 27; in a pejorative sense 4 Macc 6:19 ἀσεβείας τύπ.) τύπος γίνου τῶν πιστῶν 1 Ti 4:12.—Phil 3:17; 1 Th 1:7; 2 Th 3:9; Tit 2:7; 1 Pt 5:3; IMg 6:2.—S. ESelwyn, 1 Pt ’46, 298f.
    ⓒ of the types given by God as an indication of the future, in the form of persons or things (cp. Philo, Op. M. 157; Iren. 1, 6, 4 [Harv. I 74, 3]); of Adam: τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος (Ἀδάμ) a type of the Adam to come (i.e. of Christ) Ro 5:14. Cp. 1 Cor 10:6, 11 v.l.; B 7:3, 7, 10f; 8:1; 12:2, 5f, 10; 13:5. χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς … ἑαυτὸν τύπον ἔδειξε Jesus Christ showed himself as the prime exemplar of the resurrection AcPlCor 2:6 (cp. Just., D. 40, 1 τύπος ἦν τοῦ χριστοῦ). Also of the pictorial symbols that Hermas sees, and their deeper meaning Hv 3, 11, 4. The vision serves εἰς τύπον τῆς θλίψεως τῆς ἐπερχομένης as a symbol or foreshadowing of the tribulation to come 4, 1, 1; cp. 4, 2, 5; 4, 3, 6. The two trees are to be εἰς τύπον τοῖς δούλοις τοῦ θεοῦ Hs 2:2a; cp. b.—ἐν τύπῳ χωρίου Ῥωμαίων IRo ins is a conjecture by Zahn for ἐν τόπῳ χ. Ῥ., which is read by all mss. and makes good sense.—AvBlumenthal, Τύπος u. παράδειγμα: Her 63, 1928, 391–414; LGoppelt, Typos. D. typolog. Deutung des AT im Neuen ’39; RBultmann, TLZ 75, ’50, cols. 205–12; AFridrichsen et al., The Root of the Vine (typology) ’53; GLampe and KWoollcombe, Essays in Typology, ’57; KOstmeyer, NTS 46, ’00, 112–31.—New Docs 1, 77f; 4, 41. DELG s.v. τύπτω B. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > τύπος

  • 36 βέβαιος

    βέβαιος, α, ον (s. the next βεβαι-entries; Aeschyl., Hdt. et al.; ins, pap, rare in LXX, freq. in Philo; Jos., Ant. 13, 187; 14, 398; Just.) gener. relating to stability: ‘firm, permanent’.
    ① of something that can be relied on not to cause disappointment, reliable, in metaph. of an anchor (w. ἀσφαλής) unshifting Hb 6:19 of hope (cp. Dionys. Hal. 6, 51; Plut., Ant. 917 [3, 7]; 4 Macc 17:4) whose realization can be counted on because it does not move, being set down in the ‘holy of holies’. Sim. ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν our hope for you is firm 2 Cor 1:7 (=our expectation [of things to be fulfilled] for you is not misplaced). ἔχομεν βεβαιότερον (for superl.; cp. Stob., Flor. IV 625, 2 βεβαιοτέραν ἔχε τ. φιλίαν πρὸς τ. γονεῖς) τὸν προφητικὸν λόγον we possess the prophetic word as something that is (now) all the more reliable 2 Pt 1:19 (on β. ἔχειν cp. Thu. 1, 32; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 19 §78 ἔχειν τι βέβαιον=have a firm hold on something; UPZ 162 II, 10 [117 B.C.]; s. also Diod S in 2); for other interpretations see comm. Of things revealed reliable (w. ἰσχυρός, τεθεμελιωμένος) Hv 3, 4, 3.
    ② pert. to having continuity or being unwavering and persistent, abiding (ψυχή Did., Gen. 197, 4; of a just pers. TKellis 22, 103 [w. ἁγνός]): of boldness and hope that remain constant, steadfast Hb 3:6 v.l.; of πίστις unwavering (Appian, Liby. 64 §284 πίστις ἐστὶ βέβαιος; Diod S 2, 29, 4 πιστεύοντες βεβαιότερον=accept all the more confidently; Simplicius in Epict. p. 110, 37 πίστις βεβαία=firm faith in the immortality of the soul on the basis of a declaration by a μάντις; Esth 3:13c; 3 Macc 5:31) 1 Cl 1:2. Of love steadfast MPol 1:2. ἀρχὴν τῆς ὑποστάσεως βεβαίαν κατέχειν hold firm the original commitment Hb 3:14. (W. ἀσφαλής) ISm 8:2. ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς πίστεως βέβαιον δρόμον καταντῆσαι steadfastly finish the course of faith 1 Cl 6:2. Of the Corinthian congregation well-established, dependable (Appian, Iber. 37 §150 ἀνὴρ β., Bell. Civ. 2, 13 §47 a servant) 47:6.—ἡ βεβαία τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ῥίζα dependable root of your faith Pol 1:2 in ref. to constancy in a productive Christian life.
    ③ pert. to having validity over a period of time, in force, valid of a promise that applies to all pers. Ro 4:16; of the eucharist ISm 8:1. ὁ λόγος ἐγένετο βέβαιος (on λόγος β. cp. Pla., Phd. 90c λόγος β. καὶ ἀληθής) the word was in force Hb 2:2 (β. of the Mosaic law as Philo, Mos. 2, 14); a last will and testament valid (opp. οὐκ ἰσχύει ‘lack force’; legal t.t., s. JBehm, Διαθήκη 1912, 87, 4) Hb 9:17. βεβαίαν τὴν κλῆσιν ποιεῖσθαι keep the call in force i.e. confirm it so that it does not lapse (cp. Ael. Aristid. 13 p. 250 D.: βεβ. ἐλευθερία) 2 Pt 1:10; β. εἶναι be in force IRo 3:1 (Ignatius fears that the instructions given by the Romans to others about dying for the faith will not apply to him; he wants them to be consistent).—B. 1237. DELG. M-M. TW. Spicq.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > βέβαιος

  • 37 μέρος

    μέρος, ους, τό (Pind., Hdt.+).
    ① part, in contrast to the whole
    ⓐ gener. (Ocellus Luc. c. 12 τὸ πᾶν ἢ μέρος τι τοῦ παντός; Alex. Aphr., An. II 1 p. 13, 16 μ. ἐν ὅλῳ; Gen 47:24; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 189 τ. ὅλου κ. τῶν μερῶν al.; Ath. 12, 3 μικρῷ μέρει τοῦ παντὸς τὸ πᾶν … δοκιμάζουσιν) w. the gen. of the whole τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μ. τῆς οὐσίας the part of the property that falls to me Lk 15:12 (SIG 346, 36 τὸ μέρος τὸ ἐπιβάλλον; 1106, 80). μ. τι τοῦ ἀγροῦ a part of the field Hs 5, 2, 2. δύο μέρη τῆς ῥάβδου two thirds of the stick (Thu. 1, 104, 2 τῆς Μέμφιδος τῶν δύο μερῶν πρὸς τὸ τρίτον μέρος; SIG 975, 24f) Hs 8, 1, 12f; cp. 8, 5, 3ff; 8, 8, 4; 8, 9, 1. τὸ πλεῖστον μ. αὐτῶν 8, 2, 9; cp. 9, 7, 4 and 8, 1, 16. τὰ λοιπὰ μ. 8, 1, 15. Also without gen., when it is plain fr. the context how much of a contrast betw. part and whole is involved μὴ ἔχον μέρος τι σκοτεινόν with no dark part Lk 11:36; cp. J 19:23 (Jos., Ant. 1, 172 μέρη τέσσαρα ποιήσαντες); Ac 5:2; Rv 16:19; Hv 4, 3, 4f. Of the Christians ἐκλογῆς μ. a chosen portion fr. among all humankind 1 Cl 29:1.
    ⓑ specialized uses
    α. component, element τινὰ μέρη ἔχουσιν τ. ἀνομίας they still have certain elements of lawlessness Hv 3, 6, 4b.
    β. of parts of the body (Diod S 32, 12, 1 τὰ τοῦ σώματος μέρη; Dio Chrys. 16 [33], 62; Plut., Mor. 38a μ. τ. σώματος; Artem. 3, 51 al.; Herodian 8, 4, 10; PRyl 145, 14 [38 A.D.]; PGM 4, 2390; 2392; Tat. 16, 1) fig., of the body whose head is Christ Eph 4:16 (on the text s. μέλος 2; for the idea σῶμα, end).
    γ. τὰ μέρη the parts (of a geographical area), region, district (Herodian 6, 5, 7; Jos., Ant. 12, 234; B-D-F §141, 2; s. Rob. 408) τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 2:22. τὰ μ. τῆς Λιβύης τῆς κατὰ Κυρήνην Ac 2:10; cp. 20:2. Also of a district in or around a city (cp. UPZ 180b, 8 [113 B.C.] οἰκίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου μέρει Διὸς πόλεως) τὰ μ. Τύρου καὶ Σιδῶνος the district of Tyre and Sidon Mt 15:21; cp. 16:13; Mk 8:10; J 6:1 D; Ac 7:43 D. τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη the upper (=inland) regions, interior (cp. PHamb 54 I, 14 τὰ ἄνω μέρη of the upper Nile valley) Ac 19:1.—Eph 4:9 (s. κατώτερος).
    δ. side (Diod S 2, 9, 3 ἐφʼ ἑκάτερον μέρος=on both sides; Ex 32:15; 1 Macc 9:12; TestJud 5:4; Ath. 1, 4 τὸ ἕτερον … τῆς κεφαλῆς μέρος) Hs 9, 2, 3. τὰ δεξιὰ μ. on the right side, τὰ ἀριστερὰ μ. on the left side v 3, 1, 9; 3, 2, 1. Of a vessel τὰ δεξιὰ μ. τοῦ πλοίου the right side of the boat (as the lucky side? cp. Il. 12, 239; 13, 821 of a bird of omen) J 21:6 (of a body part POxy 3195, II 40, 43 [331 A.D.]). τὰ ἐξώτερα μ. τῆς οἰκοδομῆς the outside of the building Hs 9, 9, 3.—New Docs 3, 75.
    ε. piece ἰχθύος ὀπτοῦ μέρος a piece of broiled fish Lk 24:42.—μ. τι λαμβάνειν take a portion Hv 3, 1, 6.
    ζ. party (Jos., Bell. 1, 143; POxy 1278, 24; PFlor 47, 17; PLond III, 1028, 18 p. 277 [VII A.D.] τοῦ πρασίνου μέρους=‘of the green party’) Ac 23:6. τινὲς τ. γραμματέων τ. μέρους τ. Φαρισαίων vs. 9.
    η. branch or line of business (cp. PFlor 89, 2 after Preisigke, Berichtigungsliste 1922, 147 τὰ μέρη τῆς διοικήσεως=‘the branches of the administration’) Ac 19:27.
    θ. matter, affair (Menand., Epitr. 234 S. [58 Kö.], Per. 297 S. [107 Kö.]; Diod S 2, 27, 1; Περὶ ὕψους 12, 5 [μέρη=objects]; Jos., Ant. 15, 61 τούτῳ τῷ μέρει; PRyl 127, 12 [29 A.D.] ἀναζητῆσαι ὑπὲρ τοῦ μέρους=‘begin an investigation concerning the matter’) ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει in this case, in this matter (cp. Polyb. 18, 18, 2 τ. πίστιν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει διαφυλάττειν) 2 Cor 3:10; 9:3 (s. also ἐν μέρει in c below). Cp. 1 Pt 4:16 v.l.
    ⓒ used w. prepositions: ἀνὰ μέρος one after the other, in succession (s. ἀνά 2) 1 Cor 14:27.—ἀπὸ μέρους in part (Dio Chrys. 28 [45], 3; Ael. Aristid. 32, 4 K.=12 p. 135 D.; Ptolem., Apotel. 2, 10, 2; Epict. 1, 27, 17 διʼ ὅλων ἢ ἀ. μ.; PRyl 133, 17; BGU 1201, 15 [2 A.D.]; PTebt 402, 2; POxy 1681, 9; Just., A II, 10, 8 Χριστῷ … τῷ … ἄ. μ. γνωσθέντι) πώρωσις ἀ. μ. a partial hardening Ro 11:25. τολμηρότερον … ἀ. μ. very boldly on some points 15:15. καθὼς ἐπέγνωτε ἡμᾶς ἀ. μ. as you have understood us in part 2 Cor 1:14. Also for a while: ἀ. μ. ἐμπλησθῆναί τινος enjoy someone’s company for a while Ro 15:24; cp. 2 Cor 2:5 in some degree.—ἐκ μέρους in part, individually (Ael. Aristid. 54 p. 695 D.; 698; SIG 852, 30 … ὅλη, ἐκ μέρους δέ … ; PLond III, 1166, 14 p. 105 [42 A.D.]; BGU 538, 33; PRyl 233, 6; Philo, Mos. 2, 1 al.) individually 1 Cor 12:27. ἐκ μ. γινώσκειν know in part 13:9a, 12; cp. vs. 9b. τὸ ἐκ μ. what is ‘ in part’ = imperfect vs. 10.—ἐν μέρει in the matter of, with regard to (Antig. Car. 24; Diod S 20, 58, 5; Plut., Mor. 102e; Horapollo 1, 57 ἐν τροφῆς μέρει=‘as food’; GDI 5185, 30 [Crete] ἐν χάριτος μέρει; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 5 ἐν μέρει λόγου al.) ἐν μέρει ἑορτῆς with regard to a festival Col 2:16 (cp. ApcrEzk [Epiph. 70, 14] ἐν τῷ μέρει τῆς ἀδυναμίας ‘in connection with my disability’. See bθ above).—κατὰ μέρος part by part, in detail (ins [s. SIG ind. IV p. 444a]; PTebt 6, 24) περὶ ὧν οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν κατὰ μέρος (κ. μ. of the detailed treatment of a subj. as Pla., Theaet. 157b, Soph. 246c; Polyb. 1, 4, 6; 3, 19, 11; 3, 28, 4; 10, 27, 7 λέγειν κ. μ.; Ptolem., Apotel. 2, 11, 7; 2 Macc 2:30; Jos., Ant. 12, 245) point by point Hb 9:5.—παρὰ μέρος to one side (Appian, Liby. 14 §55 γιγνόμενος παρὰ μ.=going to one side, Bell. Civ. 5, 81 §345; PGM 13, 438 βάλε παρὰ μέρος=‘put to one side’) ὁ λίθος ὑπεχώρησε παρὰ μ. the stone went back to one side GPt 9:37.
    ⓓ as adv. acc. μέρος τι in part, partly (Thu. 2, 64; 4, 30, 1; X., Eq. 1, 12; SIG 976, 65; 1240, 8 ἤτι μέρος ἢ σύμπαν; 3 Km 12:31) 1 Cor 11:18; τὸ πλεῖστον μ. for the most part (Menand., Fgm. 789 Kö.; Diod S 22, 10, 5) Hs 8, 5, 6; 8, 10, 1. τὸ πλεῖον μ. for the greater part v 3, 6, 4a.
    ② share (Trag. et al.) μ. τι μεταδοῦναι ἀπό τινος give a share of someth. 1:5 (on μέρος ἀπό τινος cp. PStras 19, 5 [105 A.D.] τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ μέρους ἑνὸς ἀπὸ μερῶν ἐννέα) δώσω αὐτοῖς … μέρος δικαιοσύνης μετὰ τῶν ἁγίων μου I will give them … a share of uprightness with my holy ones i.e. those rescued from perdition will enjoy the same redeemed status as those who are already in the divine presence ApcPt Rainer 6. ἔχειν μ. ἔν τινι have a share in someth. (cp. Synes., Ep. 58 p. 203a οὐκ ἔστι τῷ διαβόλῳ μέρος ἐν παραδείσῳ) Rv 20:6 (Dalman, Worte 103f). ἀφελεῖ ὁ θεὸς τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου τῆς ζωῆς 22:19.— Place (Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 34 §154 ἐν ὑπηκόων ἀντὶ κοινωνῶν εἶναι μέρει=to be in the place of subjects instead of partners) τὸ μ. αὐτῶν ἐν τ. λίμνῃ their place is in the lake Rv 21:8. ἔχειν μ. μετά τινος have a place with someone J 13:8. τὸ μ. τινὸς μετὰ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν τιθέναι assign someone a place among the dissemblers (hypocrites) Mt 24:51; cp. Lk 12:46. μετʼ αὐτῶν μοι τὸ μ. γένοιτο σχεῖν ἐν (v.l. παρὰ) θεῷ may I have my place with them in (or with) God IPol 6:1. τοῦ λαβεῖν μ. ἐν ἀριθμῷ τῶν μαρτύρων MPol 14:2.—B. 934. DELG s.v. μείρομαι II. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μέρος

  • 38 οὐρανός

    οὐρανός, οῦ, ὁ 24:31 (Hom.+; ‘heaven’ in various senses)
    ① the portion or portions of the universe gener. distinguished from planet earth, heaven (so mostly in the sing.; s. B-D-F §141, 1)
    ⓐ mentioned w. the earth
    α. forming a unity w. it as the totality of creation (Pla., Euthyd. 296d οὐρανὸς καὶ γῆ; Gen 1:1; 14:19, 22; Tob 7:17 BA; Jdth 9:12; Bel 5; 1 Macc 2:37 al.; PsSol 8:7; ParJer 5:32; Just., D. 74, 1; PGM 13, 784 ὁ βασιλεύων τῶν οὐρανῶν κ. τῆς γῆς κ. πάντων τῶν ἐν αὐτοῖς ἐνδιατριβόντων; Orig., C. Cels. 6, 59, 6; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 13]) ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ Mt 5:18; 11:25; 24:35; Mk 13:31; Lk 10:21; 16:17; 21:33; Ac 4:24; 14:15; 17:24 (on the absence of the art. s. B-D-F §253, 3); Rv 14:7; 20:11; Dg 3:4; AcPlCor 2:9; 19.
    β. standing independently beside the earth or contrasted w. it: Mt 5:34f; Ac 7:49 (cp. on both Is 66:1). ἐν (τῷ) οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ (τῆς) γῆς Mt 6:10; 28:18; Lk 11:2 v.l.; Rv 5:13.—1 Cor 8:5; Rv 5:3; ISm 11:2. τὸ πρόσωπον τ. γῆς καὶ τ. οὐρανοῦ Lk 12:56. Cp. Hb 12:26 (Hg 2:6); Js 5:12.—τὰ ἔσχατα τ. γῆς as extreme contrast to heaven 1 Cl 28:3. By God’s creative word the heaven was fixed and the earth founded on the waters Hv 1, 3, 4. Neither heaven nor earth can be comprehended by human measure 16:2 (Is 40:12). On ἀπʼ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ Mk 13:27 s. under ἄκρον. ὁ πρῶτος οὐρ. καὶ ἡ πρώτη γῆ will give way in the last times to the οὐρ. καινός and the γῆ καινή Rv 21:1 (cp. Is 65:17; 66:22).
    ⓑ as firmament or sky over the earth; out of reach for humans Hm 11:18. Hence ἕως οὐρανοῦ (ApcEsdr 4:32) Mt 11:23; Lk 10:15 or εἰς τὸν οὐρ. Hv 4, 1, 5 as an expr. denoting a great height. Likew. ἀπὸ τ. γῆς ἕως τ. οὐρανοῦ 1 Cl 8:3 (scripture quot. of unknown origin); GPt 10:40 (for a transcendent being who walks on the earth and whose head touches the sky, s. Il. 4, 443). Since the heaven extends over the whole earth, ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρ. under (the) heaven = on earth, throughout the earth (Pla., Tim. 23c, Ep. 7, 326c; UPZ 106, 14 [99 B.C.]; Eccl 1:13; 3:1; Just., A II, 5, 2) Ac 2:5; 4:12; Col 1:23; Hs 9, 17, 4; m 12, 4, 2. ὑποκάτωθεν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ throughout the earth 1 Cl 53:3 (Dt 9:14). ἐκ τῆς (i.e. χώρας) ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρ. εἰς τὴν ὑπʼ οὐρανόν from one place on earth to another Lk 17:24 (cp. Dt 29:19; Bar 5:3; 2 Macc 2:18 ἐκ τῆς ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρ. εἰς τὸν ἅγιον τόπον).—In the last days there will appear τέρατα ἐν τ. οὐρανῷ ἄνω wonders in the heaven above Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3 v.l.). σημεῖον ἐν τῷ οὐρ. Rv 12:1, 3 (cp. Diod S 2, 30, 1 τὰ ἐν οὐρανῷ γινόμενα=what takes place in the heavens; Ael. Aristid. 50, 56 K.=26 p. 519 D., where the statue of Asclepius from Pergamum appears ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ). The sky can even be rolled up; s. ἑλίσσω.—Rain falls fr. heaven (X., An. 4, 2, 2) and heaven is closed to bring about a drought Lk 4:25.—Rv 11:6; Js 5:18 (cp. 2 Ch 6:26; 7:13; Sir 48:3). Lightning also comes fr. heaven (Bacchylides 17, 55f ἀπʼ οὐρανοῦ … ἀστραπάν [=Attic-ήν]) Lk 10:18. Likew. of other things that come down like rain to punish sinners: fire Lk 9:54 (cp. 4 Km 1:10; TestAbr A 10 p. 88, 14 [Stone p. 24]); Rv 20:9; fire and brimstone Lk 17:29 (cp. Gen 19:24); apocalyptic hail Rv 16:21; AcPl Ha 5, 7.
    ⓒ as starry heaven IEph 19:2. τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρ. (cp. ἄστρον and s. Eur., Phoen. 1; Diod S 6, 2, 2 ἥλιον κ. σελήνην κ. τὰ ἄλλα ἄστρα τὰ κατʼ οὐρανόν; Ael. Aristid. 43, 13 K.=1 p. 5 D.; TestAbr A 1 p. 78, 1 [Stone p. 4]; JosAs 2:11) Hb 11:12. οἱ ἀστέρες τοῦ οὐρ. 1 Cl 32:2 (Gen 22:17); cp. 10:6 (Gen 15:5). In the time of tribulation at the end of the world the stars will fall fr. heaven Mt 24:29a; Mk 13:25a; Rv 6:13; 12:4. Cp. 8:10; 9:1. ἡ στρατιὰ τοῦ οὐρ. (s. οὐράνιος) the host of heaven, of the stars, which some Israelites illicitly worshipped Ac 7:42 (worship of the στρατιὰ τοῦ οὐρ. in enmity to Yahweh also Jer 7:18; 19:13; Zeph 1:5; 2 Ch 33:3, 5). These are also meant by the δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν Mt 24:29b; Lk 21:26; cp. Mk 13:25b (cp. δύναμις 4).
    ⓓ as place of atmosphere (cp. TestAbr A 9 p. 87, 15 [Stone p. 22] εἰς τὴν αἰθέρα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ); clouds hover in it, the νεφέλαι τοῦ οὐρ. (s. νεφέλη) Mt 24:30b; 26:64; Mk 14:62; D 16:8. Likew. the birds, τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (Gen 1:26; Ps 8:9; Jdth 11:7; ParJer 7:3; cp. Bar 3:17) Mt 6:26; 8:20; 13:32; Mk 4:32; Lk 8:5; 9:58; Ac 10:12; 11:6; 6:12 (Gen 1:26), 18; Hs 9, 24, 1; GJs 3:2 codd.; 18:2 codd.—πυρράζει ὁ οὐρανός Mt 16:2, 3.—In connection w. τὸν σατανᾶν ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεσόντα Lk 10:18 the atmosphere may well be thought of as an abode of evil spirits. On Satan as the ἄρχων τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ ἀέρος, s. ἀήρ. Cp. also the λεγόμενοι θεοὶ εἴτε ἐν οὐρ. εἴτε ἐπὶ γῆς 1 Cor 8:5. In any case Rv 12:7f speaks of the dragon and his angels as being in heaven.
    ⓔ The concept of more than one heaven (the idea is Semitic; but s. FTorm, ZNW 33, ’34, 48–50, who refers to Anaximander and Aristot. Also Ps.-Apollod. 1, 6, 1, 2 ms. and Achilles Tat. 2, 36, 4 and 37, 2 ms. have οὐρανοί; Himerius, Or. 66 [=Or. 20], 4 οὐρανοί as the abode of the gods; also Hesychius Miles. [VI A.D.] c. 66 JFlach of the ‘godless heathen’ Tribonian.—Schlatter, Mt2 p. 58 on 3:2: ‘The pl. οὐρανοί is found neither in Philo nor Joseph.’ Cp. PKatz, Philo’s Bible ’50, 141–46; Mussies 84) is also found in our lit. (s. 1aα; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 15]), but it is not always possible to decide with certainty just where the idea is really alive and where it simply survives in a formula (in J’s Gospel the pl. is entirely absent; Rv has it only 12:12 [fr. LXX]. Eph always has the pl. In others the sing. and pl. are interchanged for no apparent reason [cp. Hb 9:23 w. 24 or Hv 1, 1, 4 w. 1, 2, 1; also GPt 10:40f; Ps. 113:11 lines 1 and 2; TestAbr, TestJob, Just., Tat.]): the third heaven (cp. Ps.-Lucian, Philopatris 12 ἐς τρίτον οὐρανὸν ἀεροβατήσας [s. on ἀνακαινίζω and πνεῦμα 8]; PSI 29, 2ff [IV A.D.?] ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε τὸν καθήμενον ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ οὐρανῷ … ἐν τῷ β´ οὐρ. … ἐν τῷ γ´ οὐρ.; Simplicius, In Epict. p. 100, 13 Düb. ὀκτὼ οὐρανοί; TestLevi 3:3; GrBar 11:1 εἰς πέμπτον οὐ. Combination of the third heaven and paradise, GrBar 10:1ff; ApcMos 37. S. τρίτος 1a) 2 Cor 12:2 (s. JohJeremias, Der Gottesberg 1919, 41ff; Ltzm., Hdb.4 ’49, exc. on 2 Cor 12:3f [lit.]). ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν Eph 4:10. τ. πάντα ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς κ. ἐπὶ τ. γῆς Col 1:16; cp. vs. 20. ἔργα τ. χειρῶν σού εἰσιν οἱ οὐρ. Hb 1:10 (Ps 101:26).—4:14; 7:26; 2 Pt 3:5, 7, 10, 12f (of the heavens, their destruction in the final conflagration, and their replacement by the καινοὶ οὐρ.); 1 Cl 20:1; 33:3. τακήσονταί τινες τῶν οὐρανῶν 2 Cl 16:3.—S. also Lampe s.v. 2.—From the concept of various celestial levels a transition is readily made to
    ② transcendent abode, heaven (the pl. is preferred for this mng.: B-D-F §141, 1; Rob. 408)
    ⓐ as the dwelling-place (or throne) of God (Sappho, Fgm. 56 D.2 [=Campbell 54] of Eros; Solon 1, 22 D.3 of Zeus; Hom. Hymn to Aphrodite 291 [all three οὐρ. in the sing. as the seat of the gods]; Pla., Phdr. 246e ὁ μέγας ἐν οὐρανῷ Ζεύς; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 2, 2; 3, 4 ὁ οὐρ. as οἰκητήριον θεοῦ or θεῶν; Dio Chrys. 19[36], 22 θεῶν μακάρων κατʼ οὐρανόν; Artem. 2, 68 p. 159, 13 ὁ οὐρανὸς θεῶν ἐστὶν οἶκος; Ael. Aristid. 43, 14 K.=1 p. 5 D.; Maximus Tyr. 11, 11b; ins from Saïtaï in Lydia [δύναμις 5]; IAndrosIsis, Cyrene 8 p. 129.—On the OT: GWestphal, Jahwes Wohnstätten 1908, 214–73) Mt 23:22; Ac 7:55f; Hb 8:1; 16:2b (Is 66:1); Dg 10:7. ὁ θεὸς ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρ. Hv 1, 1, 6 (cp. Tob 5:17 S). ὁ θεὸς τοῦ οὐρ. (Gen 24:3) Rv 11:13; 16:11. ὁ κύριος ἐν οὐρανοῖς Eph 6:9; cp. Col 4:1. ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν (μου, ἡμῶν) ὁ ἐν (τοῖς) οὐρ. (silver tablet fr. Amisos: ARW 12, 1909, 25 ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ μέγας ὁ ἐν οὐρανῷ καθήμενος) Mt 5:16, 45; 6:1, 9; 7:11, 21b; 10:33; 12:50; 16:17; 18:10b, 14, 19; Mk 11:25f; Lk 11:2 v.l.; D 8:2 (here the sing. ὁ ἐν τῷ οὐρ. Cp. PGM 12, 261 τῷ ἐν οὐρανῷ θεῷ). ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ the Father who (gives) from heaven Lk 11:13 (Jos., Ant. 9, 73 ἐκχέαι τὸν θεὸν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ). God dwells in τὰ ὕψη τῶν οὐρ. 1 Cl 36:2. Therefore the one who prays looks up toward heaven: ἀναβλέπειν εἰς τὸν οὐρ. (s. ἀναβλέπω 1) Mt 14:19; Mk 6:41; 7:34; Lk 9:16; MPol 9:2; 14:1. ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρ. εἶδεν δόξαν θεοῦ Ac 7:55; ἐπάρας τ. ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν οὐρ. J 17:1.—The Spirit of God comes fr. (the open) heaven Mt 3:16; Mk 1:10; Lk 3:21; J 1:32; Ac 2:2(–4); 1 Pt 1:12; AcPlCor 2:5. The voice of God resounds fr. it (Maximus Tyr. 35, 7b Διὸς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ μέγα βοῶντος, the words follow) Mt 3:17; Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; J 12:28; Ac 11:9; MPol 9:1 (cp. Just., D. 88, 8), and it is gener. the place where divine pronouncements originate Ac 11:5 and their end vs. 10. The ὀργὴ θεοῦ reveals itself fr. heaven Ro 1:18 (s. Jos., Bell. 1, 630 τὸν ἀπʼ οὐρανοῦ δικαστήν). Also, a σημεῖον ἐκ (ἀπὸ) τοῦ οὐρ. is a sign given by God Mt 16:1; Mk 8:11; Lk 11:16; cp. 21:11.—Lampe s.v. 4.
    ⓑ Christ is ἐξ οὐρανοῦ from heaven, of a heavenly nature 1 Cor 15:47 (s. ἄνθρωπος 1d. On this HKennedy, St. Paul and the Conception of the ‘Heavenly Man’: Exp. 8th ser., 7, 1913, 97–110; EGraham, CQR 113, ’32, 226) and has come down from heaven J 3:13b, 31; 6:38, 42, 50 (Ar. 15, 1 ἀπʼ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς; Mel., P. 66, 467 ἀφικόμενος ἐξ οὐρανῶν), as ὁ ἄρτος ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (s. ἄρτος 2). Cp. Ro 10:6. He returned to heaven (τὴν ἔνσαρκον εἰς τοὺς οὐρανοὺ ἀνάληψιν Iren. 1, 10, 1 [Harv. I 91, 2]; on the ascension s. CHönn, Studien zur Geschichte der Hf. im klass. Altertum: Progr. Mannheim 1910; EPfister, Der Reliquienkult im Altertum II 1912, 480ff; HDiels, Himmels u. Höllenfahrten v. Homer bis Dante: NJklA 49, 1922, 239–53; RHolland, Zur Typik der Himmelfahrt: ARW 23, 1925, 207–20; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32, 533 [ind.: Ascensus]; WMichaelis, Zur Überl. der Hf.s-geschichte: ThBl 4, 1925, 101–9; AFridrichsen, D. Hf. bei Lk: ibid. 6, 1927, 337–41; GBertram, Die Hf. Jesu vom Kreuz: Deissmann Festschr. 1927, 187–217 [UHolzmeister, ZKT 55, ’31, 44–82]; HSchlier, Christus u. d. Kirche im Eph 1930, 1ff; VLarrañaga, L’Ascension de Notre-Seigneur dans le NT ’38 [fr. Spanish]. S. also at ἀνάστασις 2 end, and διά A 2a) to live there in glory: Mk 16:19; Lk 24:51; Ac 1:10f (AZwiep, The Ascension of the Messiah in Lukan Christology ’97); 2:34; 7:55f; 9:3; 22:6; 1 Pt 3:22; 15:9. Christians await his return fr. heaven: Ac 1:11; Phil 3:20; 1 Th 1:10; 4:16; 2 Th 1:7 (Just., A I, 51, 8 al.).—When Messianic woes have come to an end, τότε φανήσεται τὸ σημεῖον τοῦ υἱοῦ τ. ἀνθρώπου ἐν οὐρανῷ then the sign of the Human One (who is) in heaven will appear; acc. to the context, the sign consists in this, that he appears visibly in heavenly glory Mt 24:30.—Lampe s.v. 10b.
    ⓒ as the abode of angels (Gen 21:17; 22:11; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 8, 12; TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 34 [Stone p. 8]; ParJer 3:2; ApcMos 38; Just., D. 57, 2) Mt 18:10a; 22:30; 24:36; 28:2; Mk 12:25; 13:32; Lk 2:15; 22:43; J 1:51; Gal 1:8; Rv 10:1; 18:1; 19:14; 20:1. Cp. Eph 3:15.—Lampe s.v. 7.
    ⓓ Christians who have died also dwell in heaven (cp. Dio Chrys. 23 [40], 35 οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ θείων κ. μακαρίων αἰώνιον τάξιν; Libanius, Or. 21 p. 459, 9 F. πόρρω τοῦ τὸν οὐρανὸν οἰκοῦντος χοροῦ; Oenomaus in Eus., PE 5, 33, 5; 12; Artem. 2, 68 p. 160, 25 τὰς ψυχὰς ἀπαλλαγείσας τῶν σωμάτων εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνιέναι τάχει χρωμένας ὑπερβάλλοντι; Himerius, Or. 8 [=23], 23: the daemon of the dead holds the σῶμα of the dead person, τὴν ψυχὴν ὁ οὐρανός; Quintus Smyrn. 7, 88; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 26 [Stone p. 54]; TestJob 39:13; ApcEsdr 7:3). Their life, τὸ ἀληθῶς ἐν οὐρανῷ ζῆν, stands in strong contrast to the ὄντως θάνατος, that leads to the everlasting fire Dg 10:7b. Rhoda, who greets Hermas from heaven Hv 1, 1, 4, need not have died (s. MDibelius, Hdb. ad loc.), and still she shows us that heaven is open to the devout. Furthermore, the true citizenship of Christians is in heaven (Tat. 16, 1 τὴν ἐν οὐρανοῖς πορείαν; s. πολίτευμα) Phil 3:20; cp. Dg 5:9. Their names are enrolled in heaven (s. βίβλος 2) Lk 10:20; Hb 12:23. In heaven there await them their glorified body 2 Cor 5:1f, their reward Mt 5:12; Lk 6:23, their treasure Mt 6:20; Lk 12:33, the things they hoped for Col 1:5, their inheritance 1 Pt 1:4. It is a place of peace Lk 19:38.—ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ the New Jerusalem (s. Ἱεροσόλυμα 2) will come down to earth Rv 3:12; 21:2, 10.
    ⓔ The concept of a heaven in which God, attendant spirits of God, and the righteous dead abide, makes it easy to understand the taking over of certain OT expressions in which heaven is personified εὐφραίνεσθε οἱ οὐρανοί (cp. Is 44:23; 49:13; Mel., P. 98, 747) Rv 12:12; cp. 18:20; 9:3 (Is 1:2); 11:2 (Jer 2:12); 1 Cl 27:7 (Ps 18:2).
    ③ an indirect reference to God, God fig. ext. of 2 (s. βασιλεία 1b.—A common Hebrew practice, but not unknown among polytheists: Philippides Com. [IV/III B.C.] 27 νὴ τὸν οὐρανόν. Acc. to Clem. Al., Protr. 5, 66, 4 Θεόφραστος πῇ μὲν οὐρανὸν, πῇ δὲ πνεῦμα τὸν θεὸν ὑπονοεῖ=Theophrastus at one time thinks of God as heaven and at another time as spirit; Appian, Hann. 56 §233 σημεῖα ἐκ Διός [ln. 14 Viereck-R.]=ἐξ οὐρανοῦ [ln. 16]; JosAs 19:2; SEG XXVIII, 1251, 3 [III/IV A.D.; s. New Docs 3, 49f]). ἁμαρτάνειν εἰς τὸν οὐρ. sin against God Lk 15:18, 21. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30f; Lk 20:4f. βασιλεία τῶν οὐρ. (GrBar 11:2) in Mt=βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ 3:2; 4:17; 5:3, 10, 19f; 7:21; 8:11; 10:7; 11:11f; 13:11, 24, 31, 33, 44f, 47, 52; 16:19; 18:1, 3f, 23; 19:12, 14, 23; 20:1; 22:2; 23:13; 25:1: J 3:5 v.l.; AcPl Ha 8, 31 (restored)=BMM verso 3.—B. 53; 1484. DELG. M-M. DLNT 439–43. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > οὐρανός

  • 39 Πέτρος

    Πέτρος, ου, ὁ (ὁ πέτρος=‘stone’ Hom.+; Jos., Bell. 3, 240, Ant. 7, 142.—Π. as a name can scarcely be pre-Christian, as AMerx, D. vier kanon. Ev. II/1, 1902, 160ff, referring to Jos., Ant. 18, 156 [Niese did not accept the v.l. Πέτρος for Πρῶτος], would have it. But s. ADell [πέτρα 1b] esp. 14–17. Fr. the beginning it was prob. thought of as the Gk. equivalent of the Aram. כֵּיפָא= Κηφᾶς: J 1:42; cp. Mt 16:18 and JWackernagel, Syntax II2 1928, 14f, perh. formed on the analogy of the Gk. male proper name Πέτρων: UPZ 149, 8 [III B.C.]; 135 [78 B.C.]; Plut., Mor. 422d.—A gentile named Πέτρος in Damasc., Vi. Isid. 170. S. also the Praeses Arabiae of 278/79 A.D. Aurelius P.: Publ. Princeton Univ. Arch. Expedition to Syria III A, 1913, 4 no. 546) Peter, surname of the head of the circle of Twelve Disciples, whose name was orig. Simon. His father was a certain John (s. Ἰωάννης 4) or Jonah (s. Ἰωνᾶς 2). Acc. to J 1:44 he himself was from Bethsaida, but, at any rate, when he met Jesus he lived in Capernaum (Mk 1:21, 29). Fr. that city he and his brother Andrew made their living as fishers (Mk 1:16). He was married (Mk 1:30; cp. 1 Cor 9:5), but left his home and occupation, when Jesus called, to follow him (Mk 1:18; 10:28). He belonged to the three or four most intimate of the Master’s companions (Mk 5:37; 9:2; 13:3; 14:33). He stands at the head of the lists of the apostles (Mt 10:2; Mk 3:16; Lk 6:14; Ac 1:13). Not all the problems connected w. the conferring of the name Cephas-Peter upon Simon (s. Σίμων 1) have yet been solved (the giving of a new name and the reason for it: Plato [s. ὀνομάζω 1] and Theophrastus [Vi. Platonis 2 ln. 21 in Biog. p. 388 W.= Prolegom. 1 in CHermann, Pla. VI 196 Θεόφραστος, Τύρταμος καλούμενος πάλαι, διὰ τὸ θεῖον τῆς φράσεως Θ. μετεκλήθη]; CRoth, Simon-Peter HTR 54, ’61, 91–97). He was at least not always a model of rock-like (πέτρος is a symbol of imperturbability Soph., Oed. Rex 334; Eur., Med. 28 al.) firmness (note Gethsemane, the denial, the unsuccessful attempt at walking on water; his conduct at Antioch Gal 2:11ff which, though, is fr. time to time referred to another Cephas; s. KLake, HTR 14, 1921, 95ff; AVöllmecke, Jahrbuch d. Missionshauses St. Gabriel 2, 1925, 69–104; 3, 1926, 31–75; DRiddle, JBL 59, ’40, 169–80; NHuffman, ibid. 64, ’45, 205f; PGaechter, ZKT 72, ’50, 177–212; but s. HBetz, Gal [Hermeneia] p. 105f w. n. 442). Despite all this he was the leader of Jesus’ disciples, was spokesman for the Twelve (e.g. Mt 18:21; 19:27; Mk 8:27ff; Lk 12:41; 18:28) and for the three who were closest to Jesus (Mk 9:5); he was recognized as leader even by those on the outside (Mt 17:24). He is especially prominent in the pronouncement made Mt 16:18. Only in the Fourth Gospel does Peter have a place less prominent than another, in this case the ‘disciple whom Jesus loved’ (s. Hdb. exc. on J 13:23). In connection w. the miraculous events after Jesus’ death (on this ELohmeyer, Galiläa u. Jerusalem ’36; WMichaelis, D. Erscheinungen d. Auferstanden-en ’44; MWerner, D. ntl. Berichte üb. d. Erscheinungen d. Auferstandenen: Schweiz. Theol. Umschau ’44) Pt. played a unique role: 1 Cor 15:5; Lk 24:34; Mk 16:7. He was one of the pillars of the early church (Gal 2:9 [Κηφᾶς]). Three years after Paul was converted, on his first journey to Jerusalem as a Christian, he established a significant contact w. Peter: Gal 1:18. At least until the time described in Gal 2:1–10 (cp. Ac 15:7) he was prob. the head of the early Christian community/church. He was also active as a missionary to Israel Gal 2:8; cp. 1 Cor 9:5 (Κηφᾶς).—MGoguel, L’apôtre Pierre a-t-il joué un role personnel dans les crises de Grèce et de Galatie?: RHPR 14, ’34, 461–500.—In 1 Pt 1:1 and 2 Pt 1:1 he appears as author of an epistle. On Paul’s journey to Rome: Ἀρτέμων ὁ κυβερνήτης τοῦ πλοίου ἦν λελουμένος ὑπὸ Πέτρου Artemon, the ship’s captain, was baptized by Peter AcPl Ha 7, 20. It is probable that he died at Rome under Nero, about 64 A.D..—In the NT he is somet. called Σίμων (q.v. 1; in Ac 15:14 and 2 Pt 1:1 more exactly Συμεών=שִׁמְעוֹן); except for Gal 2:7f Paul always calls him Κηφᾶς (q.v.). Both names Σίμων Π. Mt 16:16; Lk 5:8; J 1:40; 6:8, 68; 13:6, 9, 24, 36; 18:10, 15, 25; 20:2, 6; 21:2f, 7b, 11, 15. Σίμων ὁ λεγόμενος Π. Mt 4:18; 10:2. Σίμων ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Π. Ac 10:18; 11:13. Σίμων ὸ̔ς ἐπικαλεῖται Π. 10:5, 32.—Outside the NT it is found in our lit. GEb 34, 59; GPt 14:60 (Σίμων Πέτρος); ApcPt Rainer; GMary 463 (2 times); AcPt Ox 849 (4 times); 1 Cl 5:4 (Paul follows in 5:5); 2 Cl 5:3f (a piece fr. an apocr. gosp.); IRo 4:3 (Πέτρος καὶ Παῦλος); ISm 3:2=GHb 356, 39; Papias (2:4, w. other disciples; 15, w. Mark as his ἑρμηνευτής).—Zahn, Einl. II §38–44; KErbes, Petrus nicht in Rom, sondern in Jerusalem gestorben: ZKG 22, 1901, 1ff; 161ff (against him AKneller, ZKT 26, 1902, 33ff; 225ff; 351ff); PSchmiedel, War der Ap. Petrus in Rom?: PM 13, 1909, 59–81; HLietzmann, Petrus u. Pls in Rom2 1927; GEsser, Der hl. Ap. Petrus 1902; CGuignebert, La primauté de St. Pierre et la venue de Pierre à Rome 1909; FFoakes-Jackson, Peter, Prince of Apostles 1927; HDannenbauer, D. röm. Pt-Legende: Hist. Ztschr. 146, ’32, 239–62; 159, ’38, 81–88; KHeussi, War Pt. in Rom? ’36, War Pt. wirklich röm. Märtyrer? ’37, Neues z. Pt.-frage ’39, TLZ 77, ’52, 67–72; HLietzmann, Pt. röm. Märt.: SBBerlAk ’36, XXIX; DRobinson, JBL 64, ’45, 255–67; HSchmutz, Pt. war dennoch in Rom: Benedikt. Monatsschr. 22, ’46, 128–41.—On Mt 16:17–19 s., in addition to the lit. on κλείς 1 and πέτρα 1b: JSchnitzer, Hat Jesus das Papsttum gestiftet? 1910, Das Papsttum eine Stiftung Jesu? 1910; FTillmann, Jesus u. das Papsttum 1910; AKneller, ZKT 44, 1920, 147–69; OLinton, D. Problem der Urkirche ’32, 157–83; KPieper, Jes. u. d. Kirche ’32; AEhrhard, Urkirche u. Frühkatholizismus I 1, ’36.—JMunck, Pt. u. Pls in der Offenb. Joh. ’50 (Rv 11:3–13).—OCullmann, Petrus2, ’60 (Eng. tr. Peter, FFilson2, ’62), L’apôtre Pierre: NT Essays (TManson memorial vol.), ’59, 94–105; OKarrer, Peter and the Church: an examination of the Cullmann thesis, ’63; RO’Callaghan, Vatican Excavations and the Tomb of Peter: BA 16, ’53, 70–87; AvGerkan, D. Forschung nach dem Grab Petri, ZNW 44, ’52/53, 196–205, Zu den Problemen des Petrusgrabes: JAC ’58, 79–93; GSnyder, BA 32, ’69, 2–24; JGwynGriffiths, Hibbert Journal 55, ’56/57, 140–49; TBarnes, JTS 21, ’70, 175–79; GSchulze-Kadelbach, D. Stellung des P. in der Urchristenheit: TLZ 81, ’56, 1–18 (lit.); PGaechter, Petrus u. seine Zeit, ’58; EKirschbaum, The Tombs of St. Peter and St. Paul (transl. JMurray) ’59; EHaenchen, Petrus-Probleme, NTS 7, ’60/61, 187–97; SAgourides, Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἐν τῷ τετάρτῳ Εὐαγγελίῳ, Thessalonike, ’66; DGewalt, Petrus, diss. Hdlbg, ’66; RBrown, KDonfried, JReumann edd., Peter in the NT, ’73; CCaragounis, Peter and the Rock (BZNW 58) ’89.—Pauly-W. XIX ’38, 1335–61; Kl. Pauly IV 674–76; BHHW III 1430f. LGPN I. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > Πέτρος

  • 40 προφήτης

    προφήτης, ου, ὁ (πρό, φημί; ind., Hdt.+. Exx. in Fascher, s. end of this entry) a proclaimer or expounder of divine matters or concerns that could not ordinarily be known except by special revelation (a type of person common in polytheistic society, s. e.g. Plato Com. [V/IV B.C.] 184 [Orpheus]; Ephor. [IV B.C.]: 70 Fgm. 206 Jac. of Ammon, likew. Diod S 17, 51, 1; Plut., Numa 9, 8 the pontifex maximus as ἐξηγητὴς κ. προφήτης; Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 42 πρ. τῶν Μουσῶν; Ael. Aristid. 45, 4 K.=8 p. 83 D.: προφῆται τῶν θεῶν; 45, 7 K.=8 p. 84 D.; 46 p. 159 D.: οἱ πρ. κ. οἱ ἱερεῖς, likew. Himerius, Or. 8 [Or. 23], 11; Alciphron 4, 19, 9 Διονύσου πρ.; Himerius, Or. 38 [Or. 4], 9 Socrates as Μουσῶν καὶ Ἑρμοῦ προφήτης, Or. 48 [Or. 14], 8 προφῆται of the Egyptians [on the role of the Egypt. proph. s. HKees, Der berichtende Gottesdiener: ZASA 85, ’60, 138–43]; PGM 3, 256).
    ① a person inspired to proclaim or reveal divine will or purpose, prophet
    ⓐ of prophetic personalities in the OT who bear a message fr. God (cp. GHölscher, Die Profeten v. Israel 1914; BDuhm, Israels Propheten2 1922; HGunkel, Die Proph. 1917; LDürr, Wollen u. Wirken der atl. Proph. 1926; JSeverijn, Het Profetisme 1926; HHertzberg, Prophet u. Gott 1923; JHempel, Gott u. Mensch im AT2 ’36, 95–162). Some are mentioned by name (Moses: Orig., C. Cels. 6, 21, 8): Jeremiah Mt 2:17; 27:9. Isaiah (Did., Gen. 52, 13) 3:3; 4:14; 8:17; Lk 3:4; J 1:23; 12:38; Ac 28:25 al. Joel 2:16. Jonah Mt 12:39. Daniel 24:15. Elijah, Elisha, Ezekiel 1 Cl 17:1. Elisha Lk 4:27; AcPlCor 2:32; Samuel Ac 13:20; cp. 3:24. David 2:30 (ApcSed 14:4; Just., A I, 35, 6; JFitzmyer, CBQ 34, ’72, 332–39). Even Balaam 2 Pt 2:16.—Somet. the identity of the prophet is known only fr. the context, or the reader is simply expected to know who is meant; sim. a Gk. writer says ὁ ποιητής, feeling sure that he will be understood correctly (Antig. Car. 7 [Hom. Hymn to Hermes]; Diod S 1, 12, 9; 3, 66, 3 al. [Homer]; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 452; Ps.-Dicaearchus p. 147 F. [Il. 2, 684]; Steph. Byz. s.v. Χαλκίς [Il. 2, 537]—Did., Gen. 25, 20 [Haggai]): Mt 1:22 (Isaiah, as Just., D. 89, 3); 2:5 (Micah), 15 (Hosea); 21:4 (Zechariah); Ac 7:48 (Isaiah). See B 6:2, B 4, B 6f, B 10, B 13; B 11:2, B 4, B 9; B 14:2, B 7–9.—The pl. οἱ προφῆται brings the prophets together under one category (Iren. 1, 7, 3 [Harv. I 63, 2]; cp. Theoph. Ant. 1, 14 [p. 88, 14]): Mt 2:23; 5:12; 16:14; Mk 6:15b; Lk 1:70; 6:23; 13:28; J 1:45 (w. Moses); 8:52f; Ac 3:21; 7:52; 10:43; Ro 1:2; 1 Th 2:15; Hb 11:32 (w. David and Samuel); Js 5:10; 1 Pt 1:10 (classed under e below by ESelwyn, 1 Pt ’46, ad loc. and 259–68); 2 Pt 3:2; 1 Cl 43:1 (Μωϋσῆς καὶ οἱ λοιποί πρ.); B 1:7; IMg 9:3; IPhld 5:2; AcPl Ha 8, 16; AcPlCor 1:10; 2:9 and 36. οἱ θειότατοι πρ. IMg 8:2; οἱ ἀγαπητοὶ πρ. IPhld 9:2. οἱ ἀρχαῖοι πρ. (Jos., Ant. 12, 413) D 11:11b. S. 2 below for prophetic figures in association with their written productions.
    ⓑ John the Baptist (Just., D. 49, 3) is also called a prophet Mt 14:5; 21:26; Mk 11:32; Lk 1:76 (προφήτης ὑψίστου; cp. OGI 756, 2 τὸν προφήτην τοῦ ἁγιωτάτου θεοῦ ὑψίστου); 20:6, but Jesus declared that he was higher than the prophets Mt 11:9; Lk 7:26.
    ⓒ Jesus appears as a prophet (FGils, Jésus prophète [synoptics], ’57 [lit.]) appraised for his surprising knowledge J 4:19 and ability to perform miracles 9:17. οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ προφήτης Ἰησοῦς Mt 21:11. Cp. vs. 46; Mk 6:15a; Lk 7:16 (πρ. μέγας), 39; 13:33; 24:19; J 7:52. This proverb is applied to him: οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος εἰ μὴ ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ Mt 13:57; Mk 6:4; cp. Lk 4:24; J 4:44; Ox 1:10f (GTh 31; EPreuschen, Das Wort v. verachteten Proph.: ZNW 17, 1916, 33–48). He was also taken to be one of the ancient prophets come to life again: Mt 16:14; Mk 8:28. πρ. τις τῶν ἀρχαίων Lk 9:8, 19.—In Ac 3:22f and 7:37 (cp. 1QS 9:11), Dt 18:15, 19 is interpreted w. ref. to the Messiah and hence to Jesus (HSchoeps, Theol. u. Geschichte des Judenchristentums ’49, 87–98).—For J, Jesus is ὁ προφήτης the Prophet 6:14; 7:40, a title of honor which is disclaimed by the Baptist 1:21, 25 (s. exc. in the Hdb. on J 1:21; HFischel, JBL 65, ’46, 157–74). Cp. Lk 7:39 v.l.—RMeyer, Der Proph. aus Galiläa ’40; PDavies, Jesus and the Role of the Prophet: JBL 64, ’45, 241–54; AHiggins, Jesus as Proph.: ET 57, ’45/46, 292–94; FYoung, Jesus the Proph.: JBL 68, ’49, 285–99.—RSchnackenburg, D. Erwartung des ‘Propheten’ nach dem NT u. Qumran: Studia Evangelica ’59, 622, n. 1; HBraun, Qumran u. das NT, I, ’66, 100–106.
    ⓓ also of other pers., without excluding the actual prophets, who proclaim the divine message w. special preparation and w. a special mission (1 Macc 4:46; 14:41; Hippol., Ref. 1, prol. 10): Mt 11:9 and parallels (s. 1b above); 13:57 and parall. (s. 1c above); 23:30, 37; Lk 10:24 (on προφῆται καὶ βασιλεῖς s. Boll 136–42); 13:33f; Ac 7:52. The two prophets of God in the last times Rv 11:10 (s. μάρτυς 2c and Πέτρος, end). In several of the passages already mentioned (1 Th 2:15 [s. a above]; Mt 23:30, 37; Lk 13:34; Ac 7:52), as well as others (s. below for Mt 23:34; Lk 11:49 [OSeitz, TU 102, ’68, 236–40]), various compatriots of Jesus are murderers of prophets (cp. 3 Km 19:10, 14; Jos., Ant. 9, 265). HJSchoeps, D. jüd. Prophetenmorde ’43.—Jesus also sends to his own people προφήτας καὶ σοφούς Mt 23:34 or πρ. κ. ἀποστόλους Lk 11:49; s. also Mt 10:41 (πρ. beside δίκαιος, as 13:17). This brings us to
    ⓔ Christians, who are endowed w. the gift of προφητεία Ac 15:32; 1 Cor 14:29, 32, 37; Rv 22:6, 9; D 10:7; 13:1, 3f, 6. W. ἀπόστολοι (Celsus 2, 20) Lk 11:49; Eph 2:20 (though here the ref. could be to the OT prophets, as is surely the case in Pol 6:3. Acc. to PJoüon, RSR 15, 1925, 534f, τῶν ἀπ. καὶ πρ. in Eph 2:20 refer to the same persons); 3:5; D 11:3. πρ. stands betw. ἀπόστολοι and διδάσκαλοι 1 Cor 12:28f; cp. Eph 4:11. W. διδάσκαλοι Ac 13:1; D 15:1f. W. ἅγιοι and ἀπόστολοι Rv 18:20. W. ἅγιοι 11:18; 16:6; 18:24. Prophets foretell future events (cp. Pla., Charm. 173c προφῆται τῶν μελλόντων) Ac 11:27 (s. vs. 28); 21:10 (s. vss. 11f). True and false prophets: τὸν προφήτην καὶ τὸν ψευδοπροφήτην Hm 11:7; s. vss. 9 and 15 (the rest of this ‘mandate’ also deals w. this subj.); D 11:7–11.—Harnack, Lehre der Zwölf Apostel 1884, 93ff; 119ff, Mission4 I 1923, 344f; 362ff; Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 236–40; s. ESelwyn on 1 Pt 1:10 in 1a above; HGreeven, Propheten, Lehrer, Vorsteher b. Pls: ZNW 44, ’52/53, 3–15.
    ⓕ Only in one place in our lit. is a polytheist called a ‘prophet’, i.e. the poet whose description of the Cretans is referred to in Tit 1:12: ἴδιος αὐτῶν προφήτης their (the Cretans’) own prophet (s. ἀργός 2).
    ② by metonymy, the writings of prophets. The prophet also stands for his book ἀνεγίνωσκεν τ. προφήτην Ἠσαί̈αν Ac 8:28, 30; cp. Mk 1:2. λέγει (κύριος) ἐν τῷ προφήτῃ B 7:4. ἐν ἄλλῳ πρ. λέγει 11:6. See 6:14; 12:1 and 4. Pl. of the prophets as a division of scripture: οἱ προφῆται καὶ ὁ νόμος (s. 2 Macc 15:9; Mel., HE 4, 26, 13, P. 72, 530) Mt 11:13. Cp. Lk 16:16; Ac 13:15; 24:14; Ro 3:21; Dg 11:6. Μωϋσῆς κ. οἱ πρ. Lk 16:29, 31. Cp. also 24:27; Ac 28:23. πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Μωϋσέως καὶ τοῖς προφήταις καὶ ψαλμοῖς Lk 24:44. Now and then οἱ προφῆται alone may mean all scripture Lk 24:25; J 6:45 (s. JHänel, Der Schriftbegriff Jesu 1919, 21); Hb 1:1 (s. CBüchel, Der Hb u. das AT: StKr 79, 1906, 508–91).—οἱ πρ. Mt 5:17; 7:12; 22:40 (all three w. ὁ νόμος) unmistakably refers to the contents of the prophetic books.—EFascher, Προφήτης. Eine sprach-und religionsgeschichtliche Untersuchung 1927; GFohrer, TRu 19, ’51, 277–346; 20. ’52. 193–271, 295–361; JLindblom, Prophecy in Ancient Israel ’67; DAune, Prophecy ’83; ASchwemer ZTK 96, ’99, 320--50 (prophet as martyr); Pauly-W. XXIII 797ff; Kl. Pauly IV, 1183f; BHHW III 1496–1514.—DELG s.v. φημί II A. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > προφήτης

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • Whose Line Is It Anyway? — Género Comedia improvisada Presentado por Clive Anderson (Reino Unido) Drew Carey (EE.UU) País de origen Reino Unido …   Wikipedia Español

  • Whose Line Is It Anyway? — Infobox Television show name = Whose Line Is It Anyway? caption = format = Improvisational Comedy picture format = 4:3 runtime = Flagicon|UK: 24 25 mins, 37 mins (Christmas Special) Flagicon|USA: 21 22 mins creator = Dan Patterson Mark Leveson… …   Wikipedia

  • Whose Side Are You On? — Infobox Album Name = Whose Side Are You On? Type = studio Longtype = Artist = Matt Bianco Released = 1984 Recorded = 1984 Genre = Jazz / Pop / Soul / Ballad Length = 40:58 (LP) 44:36 (CD) 53:12 (MC) Label = WEA Producer = Danny White Mark Reilly… …   Wikipedia

  • whose — [ huz ] function word *** Whose can be used in the following ways: as a determiner (introducing a direct or indirect question): Whose idea was it to come here? (introducing a relative clause): The winner was a Brazilian player, whose name I have… …   Usage of the words and phrases in modern English

  • Whose Wedding Is It Anyway? — is an American reality TV show on the Style Network. Season 1 began in 2003, Tuesdays, 10 p.m. [cite web |url=http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp dyn/content/article/2006/09/29/AR2006092900495 pf.html |title=Here Comes the Bride… …   Wikipedia

  • Whose Bed Have Your Boots Been Under? — Single par Shania Twain extrait de l’album The Woman in Me Face A Whose Bed Have Your Boots Been Under? Face B Any Man of Mine Sortie 2 janvier 1995 …   Wikipédia en Français

  • For — For, prep. [AS. for, fore; akin to OS. for, fora, furi, D. voor, OHG. fora, G. vor, OHG. furi, G. f[ u]r, Icel. fyrir, Sw. f[ o]r, Dan. for, adv. f[ o]r, Goth. fa[ u]r, fa[ u]ra, L. pro, Gr. ?, Skr. pra . [root] 202. Cf. {Fore}, {First},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • For — For, prep. [AS. for, fore; akin to OS. for, fora, furi, D. voor, OHG. fora, G. vor, OHG. furi, G. f[ u]r, Icel. fyrir, Sw. f[ o]r, Dan. for, adv. f[ o]r, Goth. fa[ u]r, fa[ u]ra, L. pro, Gr. ?, Skr. pra . [root] 202. Cf. {Fore}, {First},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • For all me — For For, prep. [AS. for, fore; akin to OS. for, fora, furi, D. voor, OHG. fora, G. vor, OHG. furi, G. f[ u]r, Icel. fyrir, Sw. f[ o]r, Dan. for, adv. f[ o]r, Goth. fa[ u]r, fa[ u]ra, L. pro, Gr. ?, Skr. pra . [root] 202. Cf. {Fore}, {First},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • For all that — For For, prep. [AS. for, fore; akin to OS. for, fora, furi, D. voor, OHG. fora, G. vor, OHG. furi, G. f[ u]r, Icel. fyrir, Sw. f[ o]r, Dan. for, adv. f[ o]r, Goth. fa[ u]r, fa[ u]ra, L. pro, Gr. ?, Skr. pra . [root] 202. Cf. {Fore}, {First},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • For all the world — For For, prep. [AS. for, fore; akin to OS. for, fora, furi, D. voor, OHG. fora, G. vor, OHG. furi, G. f[ u]r, Icel. fyrir, Sw. f[ o]r, Dan. for, adv. f[ o]r, Goth. fa[ u]r, fa[ u]ra, L. pro, Gr. ?, Skr. pra . [root] 202. Cf. {Fore}, {First},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»